Apache OpenOffice Wiki - User contributions [en]

Zh/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Borders backgrounds boundaries

2009-10-02T01:58:46Z

Claire: /* 選擇背景的顏色與圖形 */

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Borders, backgrounds, and boundaries}}
{{Documentation/WG3TablesTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Merging splitting cells
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Formatting table text
}}__notoc__
== 表格邊框 ==
在表格格式對話框，選擇邊框選項（圖6）。

在這裡您可以設定整個表或數個儲存格的邊框。此外，也可為整張表加入陰影。

邊框由三個部分組成：線條的排序，線條的類型，至內文的距離

* 在指定的邊界線條的排序。如果選定一組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式。您可以在外邊框選定的儲存格指定邊框的風格。OOo的提供5種排序方法，但你可以在自訂的範圍很輕鬆地按一下並得到正是您想要的樣子。當您選定多組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式時，請點選在十字線條排序，可以同時修改多個邊界（圖中所示，儲存格右邊框正在進行修改）

{{Documentation/Note| 當選定一組具有不同風格的邊框的儲存格時，預設邊框線條顏色為灰色。你可以重新設定這個新的邊框樣式（一次點擊），當他們（第二次點擊），代表取消的邊框，或（第三次點擊）刪除所有的邊框。}}

[[Image:WG9-8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog box: Borders page.'']]

* 線條類型:樣式和顏色。有多個不同樣式和顏色可供選擇。
* 至內文的距離:距離可以指定左，右，上面和下面。同步化則是輸入新的間隔時，所有的四個邊框都會套用相同的 [至內容的間隔] 設定的。
* 陰影的樣式是適用於整個表格，陰影由三個部分組成：位置，間隔，以及它的顏色。.
* 如果選定合併相鄰行樣式，將 Writer 表格中相鄰儲存格的兩種不同邊框樣式合併為一種邊框樣式。此特性對 Writer 文件中的整份表格都有效。.

{{Documentation/Tip| To reset everything if you are having problems with borders, right-click in the table and select '''Table''' or select '''Table > Table Properties''' from the menu bar. On the '''Borders''' tab, select the '''Set No Borders''' icon under ''Line arrangement'': ''Default'' (the box on the left).}}

== 選擇背景的顏色與圖形==
一個表的背景可以提升資料的可讀性，可以突顯出表格中最重要的部分（如標題或特定的儲存格），或者使表格更具吸引力。您可以選擇兩種類型的背景：純色或圖形。背景可以應用到整個表，一個儲存格，或一行。

當你想建立背景顏色或圖形當作表格的標題，這是非常快速的選擇，該表在本指南中採用這種技術.

儲存格，行或表設定背景：

<ol>
<li>將指標放置在儲存格內、行、表格或你想工作的任何地方，如果您想應用多個儲存格的背景，選擇多個儲存格.</li>
<li>點選滑鼠右鍵，從彈出的選單中選擇表格，或從主選單選擇表>“表格屬性。.</li>
<li>在表格對話框，選擇背景標籤。.</li>
<li>在設定時，選擇是否應用在設定的儲存格，行或表。.</li>

* 如果您選擇儲存格，變化只適用於選定的儲存格或指標所在的儲存格。即使設定多個儲存格的背景也會套用到每個儲存格.
* 如果您選擇行，指標所在的地方會影響整行改變。.
* 如果您選擇表，不管指標位置或選定的儲存格，變更背景則影響整個表。.

[[Image:WG3Ch9F7.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog: inserting a graphic table background'']]

<li>在''As'' 選項中, 則是選擇背景是顏色或圖形.</li>

如果要使用顏色背景，選擇顏色，然後點選”確定” 。請記住，您可以增加自訂的顏色選擇工具 “> 選項 ”> 顏色

如果要使用圖形:

<ol style="list-style-type:lower-alpha">
<li>首先要按下瀏覽按鈕，然後從你的電腦選擇圖片.)</li>
<li>您可以使用連結選項連結圖片。如果是連結，圖片的改變（例如，如果您編輯它在不同的軟體）就會直接顯示您的文檔。然而，您還需要保持維護文件檔的圖片。例如，您發送沒有圖形檔電子郵件，那麼圖形將不再看見。.</li>
<li>在type裡，可選擇設定圖形類型.</li>

* 如果你選擇'''Position''', 選取此選項，然後按一下位置網格中的一個位置。
* 如果你選擇'''Area''',拉伸圖形以充填所選物件的整個背景。
* 如果是 '''Tile''', 重複圖形，使其覆蓋所選物件的整個背景。

<li>如果點選預覽選項，圖形顯示在右側窗格中。.</li>
<li>確定要此圖片後, 請按下確定鈕.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
下圖為設定背景圖片的範例表，而第一行的背景設定為顏色。正如你所看到的，行的背景涵蓋表背景。
[[Image:WG3Ch9F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Example of table with different row and table backgrounds'']]

== Displaying or hiding table boundaries ==
A ''table boundary'' is a set of pale (usually gray) lines around the cells when viewed on‑screen in OOo. These boundaries are not printed; their only function is to help you see where the table cells are.

To display the table the same way on the screen as on the printed page, with no boundary lines, right-click on the table and select '''Table Boundaries''' from the pop-up menu. Repeat this to have the boundaries appear again.

{{Documentation/Note| Turning boundaries off does not hide the borders that the table may have.}}

{{Documentation/Tip| You can also turn table boundaries on and off through '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Appearance'''. On that page, you can display or hide boundaries around text, pages headers and footers, figures, and other parts of a document.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Zh/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Borders backgrounds boundaries

2009-10-01T15:49:27Z

Claire: /* 選擇背景的顏色與圖形 */

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Borders, backgrounds, and boundaries}}
{{Documentation/WG3TablesTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Merging splitting cells
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Formatting table text
}}__notoc__
== 表格邊框 ==
在表格格式對話框，選擇邊框選項（圖6）。

在這裡您可以設定整個表或數個儲存格的邊框。此外，也可為整張表加入陰影。

邊框由三個部分組成：線條的排序，線條的類型，至內文的距離

* 在指定的邊界線條的排序。如果選定一組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式。您可以在外邊框選定的儲存格指定邊框的風格。OOo的提供5種排序方法，但你可以在自訂的範圍很輕鬆地按一下並得到正是您想要的樣子。當您選定多組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式時，請點選在十字線條排序，可以同時修改多個邊界（圖中所示，儲存格右邊框正在進行修改）

{{Documentation/Note| 當選定一組具有不同風格的邊框的儲存格時，預設邊框線條顏色為灰色。你可以重新設定這個新的邊框樣式（一次點擊），當他們（第二次點擊），代表取消的邊框，或（第三次點擊）刪除所有的邊框。}}

[[Image:WG9-8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog box: Borders page.'']]

* 線條類型:樣式和顏色。有多個不同樣式和顏色可供選擇。
* 至內文的距離:距離可以指定左，右，上面和下面。同步化則是輸入新的間隔時，所有的四個邊框都會套用相同的 [至內容的間隔] 設定的。
* 陰影的樣式是適用於整個表格，陰影由三個部分組成：位置，間隔，以及它的顏色。.
* 如果選定合併相鄰行樣式，將 Writer 表格中相鄰儲存格的兩種不同邊框樣式合併為一種邊框樣式。此特性對 Writer 文件中的整份表格都有效。.

{{Documentation/Tip| To reset everything if you are having problems with borders, right-click in the table and select '''Table''' or select '''Table > Table Properties''' from the menu bar. On the '''Borders''' tab, select the '''Set No Borders''' icon under ''Line arrangement'': ''Default'' (the box on the left).}}

== 選擇背景的顏色與圖形==
一個表的背景可以提升資料的可讀性，可以突顯出表格中最重要的部分（如標題或特定的儲存格），或者使表格更具吸引力。您可以選擇兩種類型的背景：純色或圖形。背景可以應用到整個表，一個儲存格，或一行。

當你想建立背景顏色或圖形當作表格的標題，這是非常快速的選擇，該表在本指南中採用這種技術.

儲存格，行或表設定背景：

<ol>
<li>將指標放置在儲存格內、行、表格或你想工作的任何地方，如果您想應用多個儲存格的背景，選擇多個儲存格.</li>
<li>點選滑鼠右鍵，從彈出的選單中選擇表格，或從主選單選擇表>“表格屬性。.</li>
<li>在表格對話框，選擇背景標籤。.</li>
<li>在設定時，選擇是否應用在設定的儲存格，行或表。.</li>

* 如果您選擇儲存格，變化只適用於選定的儲存格或指標所在的儲存格。即使設定多個儲存格的背景也會套用到每個儲存格.
* 如果您選擇行，指標所在的地方會影響整行改變。.
* 如果您選擇表，不管指標位置或選定的儲存格，變更背景則影響整個表。.

[[Image:WG3Ch9F7.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog: inserting a graphic table background'']]

<li>在''As'' 選項中, 則是選擇背景是顏色或圖形.</li>

如果要使用顏色背景，選擇顏色，然後點選”確定” 。請記住，您可以增加自訂的顏色選擇工具 “> 選項 ”> 顏色

如果要使用圖形:

<ol style="list-style-type:lower-alpha">
<li>首先要按下瀏覽按鈕，然後從你的電腦選擇圖片.)</li>
<li>您可以使用連結選項連結圖片。如果是連結，圖片的改變（例如，如果您編輯它在不同的軟體）就會直接顯示您的文檔。然而，您還需要保持維護文件檔的圖片。例如，您發送沒有圖形檔電子郵件，那麼圖形將不再看見。.</li>
<li>在type裡，可選擇設定圖形類型.</li>

* 如果你選擇'''Position''', 你可以選擇圖形顯示區域的位置.
* 如果你選擇'''Area''', 圖形將被擴大到填補整個區域.
* 如果是 '''Tile''', 該圖形鋪滿（重複水平和垂直），以填補該區域.

<li>如果點選預覽選項，圖形顯示在右側窗格中。.</li>
<li>確定要此圖片後, 請按下確定鈕.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
下圖為設定背景圖片的範例表，而第一行的背景設定為顏色。正如你所看到的，行的背景涵蓋表背景。
[[Image:WG3Ch9F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Example of table with different row and table backgrounds'']]

== Displaying or hiding table boundaries ==
A ''table boundary'' is a set of pale (usually gray) lines around the cells when viewed on‑screen in OOo. These boundaries are not printed; their only function is to help you see where the table cells are.

To display the table the same way on the screen as on the printed page, with no boundary lines, right-click on the table and select '''Table Boundaries''' from the pop-up menu. Repeat this to have the boundaries appear again.

{{Documentation/Note| Turning boundaries off does not hide the borders that the table may have.}}

{{Documentation/Tip| You can also turn table boundaries on and off through '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Appearance'''. On that page, you can display or hide boundaries around text, pages headers and footers, figures, and other parts of a document.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Zh/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Borders backgrounds boundaries

2009-10-01T15:21:13Z

Claire: /* Selecting background colors and graphics */

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Borders, backgrounds, and boundaries}}
{{Documentation/WG3TablesTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Merging splitting cells
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Formatting table text
}}__notoc__
== 表格邊框 ==
在表格格式對話框，選擇邊框選項（圖6）。

在這裡您可以設定整個表或數個儲存格的邊框。此外，也可為整張表加入陰影。

邊框由三個部分組成：線條的排序，線條的類型，至內文的距離

* 在指定的邊界線條的排序。如果選定一組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式。您可以在外邊框選定的儲存格指定邊框的風格。OOo的提供5種排序方法，但你可以在自訂的範圍很輕鬆地按一下並得到正是您想要的樣子。當您選定多組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式時，請點選在十字線條排序，可以同時修改多個邊界（圖中所示，儲存格右邊框正在進行修改）

{{Documentation/Note| 當選定一組具有不同風格的邊框的儲存格時，預設邊框線條顏色為灰色。你可以重新設定這個新的邊框樣式（一次點擊），當他們（第二次點擊），代表取消的邊框，或（第三次點擊）刪除所有的邊框。}}

[[Image:WG9-8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog box: Borders page.'']]

* 線條類型:樣式和顏色。有多個不同樣式和顏色可供選擇。
* 至內文的距離:距離可以指定左，右，上面和下面。同步化則是輸入新的間隔時，所有的四個邊框都會套用相同的 [至內容的間隔] 設定的。
* 陰影的樣式是適用於整個表格，陰影由三個部分組成：位置，間隔，以及它的顏色。.
* 如果選定合併相鄰行樣式，將 Writer 表格中相鄰儲存格的兩種不同邊框樣式合併為一種邊框樣式。此特性對 Writer 文件中的整份表格都有效。.

{{Documentation/Tip| To reset everything if you are having problems with borders, right-click in the table and select '''Table''' or select '''Table > Table Properties''' from the menu bar. On the '''Borders''' tab, select the '''Set No Borders''' icon under ''Line arrangement'': ''Default'' (the box on the left).}}

== 選擇背景的顏色與圖形==
一個表的背景可以提升資料的可讀性，可以突顯出表格中最重要的部分（如標題或特定的儲存格），或者使表格更具吸引力。您可以選擇兩種類型的背景：純色或圖形。背景可以應用到整個表，一個儲存格，或一行。

當你想建立背景顏色或圖形當作表格的標題，這是非常快速的選擇，該表在本指南中採用這種技術.

儲存格，行或表設定背景：

<ol>
<li>將指標放置在儲存格內、行、表格或你想工作的任何地方，如果您想應用多個儲存格的背景，選擇多個儲存格.</li>
<li>點選滑鼠右鍵，從彈出的選單中選擇表格，或從主選單選擇表>“表格屬性。.</li>
<li>在表格對話框，選擇背景標籤。.</li>
<li>在設定時，選擇是否應用在設定的儲存格，行或表。.</li>

* 如果您選擇儲存格，變化只適用於選定的儲存格或指標所在的儲存格。即使設定多個儲存格的背景也會套用到每個儲存格.
* 如果您選擇行，指標所在的地方會影響整行改變。.
* 如果您選擇表，不管指標位置或選定的儲存格，變更背景則影響整個表。.

[[Image:WG3Ch9F7.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog: inserting a graphic table background'']]

<li>In the ''As'' section, choose whether the background is a color or a graphic.</li>

To apply a color, select the color and click '''OK'''. Remember that you can add custom colors by choosing '''Tools > Options > Colors'''.

To apply a graphic:

<ol style="list-style-type:lower-alpha">
<li>First select the graphic from your computer's file system with the '''Browse''' button. (Writer supports a large number of graphics formats.)</li>
<li>You can use the '''Link''' option to link the graphic file. If it is linked, changes to the graphic (for example, if you edit it in a different software package) are reflected in your document. However, you also need to keep the linked graphic file with the document file. If, for example, you email the document without the graphic file, the graphic will no longer be visible.</li>
<li>Under ''Type'', select the type of placement for the graphic.</li>

* If you choose '''Position''', you can select in the position map where the graphic will be displayed in the selected area.
* If you choose '''Area''', the graphic is stretched to fill the whole area.
* If '''Tile''', the graphic is tiled (repeated horizontally and vertically) to fill the area.

<li>If the '''Preview''' option is checked, the graphic displays in the pane on the right.</li>
<li>To apply the graphic, click '''OK'''.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
The figure below shows an example of a table set with a background image, and the first row background colored. As you can see, the row background covers the table background.

[[Image:WG3Ch9F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Example of table with different row and table backgrounds'']]

== Displaying or hiding table boundaries ==
A ''table boundary'' is a set of pale (usually gray) lines around the cells when viewed on‑screen in OOo. These boundaries are not printed; their only function is to help you see where the table cells are.

To display the table the same way on the screen as on the printed page, with no boundary lines, right-click on the table and select '''Table Boundaries''' from the pop-up menu. Repeat this to have the boundaries appear again.

{{Documentation/Note| Turning boundaries off does not hide the borders that the table may have.}}

{{Documentation/Tip| You can also turn table boundaries on and off through '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Appearance'''. On that page, you can display or hide boundaries around text, pages headers and footers, figures, and other parts of a document.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Borders backgrounds boundaries

2009-10-01T05:41:35Z

Claire: /* Specifying table borders */

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Borders, backgrounds, and boundaries}}
{{Documentation/WG3TablesTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Merging splitting cells
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Formatting table text
}}__notoc__
== 表格邊框 ==
在表格格式對話框，選擇邊框選項（圖6）。

在這裡您可以設定整個表或數個儲存格的邊框。此外，也可為整張表加入陰影。

邊框由三個部分組成：線條的排序，線條的類型，至內文的距離

* 在指定的邊界線條的排序。如果選定一組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式。您可以在外邊框選定的儲存格指定邊框的風格。OOo的提供5種排序方法，但你可以在自訂的範圍很輕鬆地按一下並得到正是您想要的樣子。當您選定多組的儲存格的邊套用於這些格式時，請點選在十字線條排序，可以同時修改多個邊界（圖中所示，儲存格右邊框正在進行修改）

{{Documentation/Note| 當選定一組具有不同風格的邊框的儲存格時，預設邊框線條顏色為灰色。你可以重新設定這個新的邊框樣式（一次點擊），當他們（第二次點擊），代表取消的邊框，或（第三次點擊）刪除所有的邊框。}}

[[Image:WG9-8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog box: Borders page.'']]

* 線條類型:樣式和顏色。有多個不同樣式和顏色可供選擇。
* 至內文的距離:距離可以指定左，右，上面和下面。同步化則是輸入新的間隔時，所有的四個邊框都會套用相同的 [至內容的間隔] 設定的。
* 陰影的樣式是適用於整個表格，陰影由三個部分組成：位置，間隔，以及它的顏色。.
* 如果選定合併相鄰行樣式，將 Writer 表格中相鄰儲存格的兩種不同邊框樣式合併為一種邊框樣式。此特性對 Writer 文件中的整份表格都有效。.

{{Documentation/Tip| To reset everything if you are having problems with borders, right-click in the table and select '''Table''' or select '''Table > Table Properties''' from the menu bar. On the '''Borders''' tab, select the '''Set No Borders''' icon under ''Line arrangement'': ''Default'' (the box on the left).}}

== Selecting background colors and graphics ==
A table background can greatly improve the readability of the data, visually highlight important parts of the table (such as the heading or a specific cell), or just make the table more appealing. You can choose between two types of background when formatting the table: solid color or graphic. The background can be applied to the whole table, to a single cell, or to a row. The background selected for a cell will be in front of the row background which in turn will hide the table background.

The row background option is quite handy when you want to create alternate color rows or assign a different background to the heading of the table. The tables in this guide adopt this technique.

To set the background for a cell, row, or table:
<ol>
<li>Place the cursor anywhere inside the cell, row or table you want to work with. If you want to apply a background to a group of cells, select the group.</li>
<li>Right-click and select '''Table''' from the pop-up menu, or select '''Table > Table Properties''' from the main menu.</li>
<li>In the Table Format dialog box, select the ''Background'' tab.</li>
<li>In the ''For'' section, chose whether to apply the settings to cell, row, or table.</li>

* If you choose '''Cell''', changes apply only to the selected cells, or the cell where the cursor currently resides. Even when selecting a group of cells, the background settings are applied to each cell individually.
* If you choose '''Row''', changes affect the entire row where the cursor resides.
* If you choose '''Table''', changes will set the background for the entire table, regardless of the cursor position or selected cells.

[[Image:WG3Ch9F7.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog: inserting a graphic table background'']]

<li>In the ''As'' section, choose whether the background is a color or a graphic.</li>

To apply a color, select the color and click '''OK'''. Remember that you can add custom colors by choosing '''Tools > Options > Colors'''.

To apply a graphic:

<ol style="list-style-type:lower-alpha">
<li>First select the graphic from your computer's file system with the '''Browse''' button. (Writer supports a large number of graphics formats.)</li>
<li>You can use the '''Link''' option to link the graphic file. If it is linked, changes to the graphic (for example, if you edit it in a different software package) are reflected in your document. However, you also need to keep the linked graphic file with the document file. If, for example, you email the document without the graphic file, the graphic will no longer be visible.</li>
<li>Under ''Type'', select the type of placement for the graphic.</li>

* If you choose '''Position''', you can select in the position map where the graphic will be displayed in the selected area.
* If you choose '''Area''', the graphic is stretched to fill the whole area.
* If '''Tile''', the graphic is tiled (repeated horizontally and vertically) to fill the area.

<li>If the '''Preview''' option is checked, the graphic displays in the pane on the right.</li>
<li>To apply the graphic, click '''OK'''.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
The figure below shows an example of a table set with a background image, and the first row background colored. As you can see, the row background covers the table background.

[[Image:WG3Ch9F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Example of table with different row and table backgrounds'']]

== Displaying or hiding table boundaries ==
A ''table boundary'' is a set of pale (usually gray) lines around the cells when viewed on‑screen in OOo. These boundaries are not printed; their only function is to help you see where the table cells are.

To display the table the same way on the screen as on the printed page, with no boundary lines, right-click on the table and select '''Table Boundaries''' from the pop-up menu. Repeat this to have the boundaries appear again.

{{Documentation/Note| Turning boundaries off does not hide the borders that the table may have.}}

{{Documentation/Tip| You can also turn table boundaries on and off through '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Appearance'''. On that page, you can display or hide boundaries around text, pages headers and footers, figures, and other parts of a document.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Cutting copying pasting text

2009-10-01T04:01:15Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Cutting, copying, and pasting text}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Selecting text
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Finding and replacing
}}__notoc__
在Write中剪下和複製文件就跟在其他應用程序剪下和複製文件是類似的。你可以在文件之間複製或移動文檔中的文字，透過拖動或使用選單圖標，或者鍵盤快捷方式。您也可以從其他來源複製文件，如網頁，並將其貼上另一個文件。

使用鼠標來移動（剪下和貼上）所選的文字，將其拖動到新的位置，並放開它。
要複製選定的文字，需按住Ctrl鍵的且同時拖動。在移動時也會保有原本格式。

選擇文字後，您可以使用滑鼠或鍵盤來執行這些動作
。

| [[Image:Cut-icon.png]]
| 剪下: 使用“ 編輯 > 剪下或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ X或工具欄上的圖標-剪下
|-

| [[Image:Copy-icon.png]]
| 複製: 使用“ 編輯 > 複製或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ C或工具欄上的圖標-複製

| [[Image:Paste-icon.png]]
| 貼上: 使用“ 編輯 > 貼上或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ C或工具欄上的圖標-貼上
|}

如果你點選貼上圖標，那文件上的格式(如粗體或斜體)會保留下來，從網站和其他來源貼上的文件也可放入框架或表格。.如果你不滿意結果，請點選圖標或取消按 Ctrl + ž。

為了使所貼上的文件格式，照原本格式貼上，請選擇：

* '''編輯 > 選擇性貼上'''
* 或點選貼上圖標右方的三角形按鍵
* 或點選標滑鼠左鍵貼上圖標

然後從結果選單中選擇無格式文件。
在貼上選單上的選擇的範圍都有所不同來源和格式的文本（或其他對象）。見下面的例子。

[[Image:Paste-submenu.png|thumb|none|500px|''Paste Special menu.'']]

This example includes the formatting option DDE link. DDE is an acronym for Dynamic Data Exchange, a mechanism whereby selected data in document ''A'' can be pasted into document ''B'' as a linked, ‘live’ copy of the original. It would be used, for example, in a report written in Writer containing time‑varying data, such as sales results sourced from a Calc spreadsheet. The DDE link ensures that, as the source spreadsheet is updated so is the report, thus reducing the scope for error and reducing the work involved in keeping the Writer document up to date.

=Moving paragraphs quickly=
With the cursor anywhere in the paragraph:

# Press and hold the ''Control+Alt'' keys.
# While holding the ''Control+Alt'' keys down, press the up-arrow or down-arrow key.

The paragraph will move to a new location either before the previous paragraph or after the next paragraph in your document. To move more than one paragraph at a time, select at least part of all paragraphs (including the end of the first paragraph you want to move and the start of the last) before pressing the ''Control+Alt+arrow'' keys.

If you are using Solaris, the key combination is ''Control+AltGr+arrow'' keys.

{{Documentation/Tip| If your paragraphs suddenly jumped from one place to another, the most likely reason is that you have accidentally pressed one of these key combinations.}}

{{Documentation/Note| In some machines the ''Control+Alt+arrow'' key combination is reserved for screen flipping. You have to deactivate or assign different key combination for screen flipping (usually through display / graphics adapter settings in your computer) before using this feature.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Cutting copying pasting text

2009-10-01T04:00:50Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Cutting, copying, and pasting text}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Selecting text
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Finding and replacing
}}__notoc__
在Write中剪下和複製文件就跟在其他應用程序剪下和複製文件是類似的。你可以在文件之間複製或移動文檔中的文字，透過拖動或使用選單圖標，或者鍵盤快捷方式。您也可以從其他來源複製文件，如網頁，並將其貼上另一個文件。

使用鼠標來移動（剪下和貼上）所選的文字，將其拖動到新的位置，並放開它。
要複製選定的文字，需按住Ctrl鍵的且同時拖動。在移動時也會保有原本格式。

選擇文字後，您可以使用滑鼠或鍵盤來執行這些動作
。

| [[Image:Cut-icon.png]]
| 剪下: 使用“ 編輯 > 剪下或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ X或工具欄上的圖標-剪下
|-
| [[Image:Copy-icon.png]]
| 複製: 使用“ 編輯 > 複製或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ C或工具欄上的圖標-複製

| [[Image:Paste-icon.png]]
| 貼上: 使用“ 編輯 > 貼上或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ C或工具欄上的圖標-貼上
|}

如果你點選貼上圖標，那文件上的格式(如粗體或斜體)會保留下來，從網站和其他來源貼上的文件也可放入框架或表格。.如果你不滿意結果，請點選圖標或取消按 Ctrl + ž。

為了使所貼上的文件格式，照原本格式貼上，請選擇：

* '''編輯 > 選擇性貼上'''
* 或點選貼上圖標右方的三角形按鍵
* 或點選標滑鼠左鍵貼上圖標

然後從結果選單中選擇無格式文件。
在貼上選單上的選擇的範圍都有所不同來源和格式的文本（或其他對象）。見下面的例子。

[[Image:Paste-submenu.png|thumb|none|500px|''Paste Special menu.'']]

This example includes the formatting option DDE link. DDE is an acronym for Dynamic Data Exchange, a mechanism whereby selected data in document ''A'' can be pasted into document ''B'' as a linked, ‘live’ copy of the original. It would be used, for example, in a report written in Writer containing time‑varying data, such as sales results sourced from a Calc spreadsheet. The DDE link ensures that, as the source spreadsheet is updated so is the report, thus reducing the scope for error and reducing the work involved in keeping the Writer document up to date.

=Moving paragraphs quickly=
With the cursor anywhere in the paragraph:

# Press and hold the ''Control+Alt'' keys.
# While holding the ''Control+Alt'' keys down, press the up-arrow or down-arrow key.

The paragraph will move to a new location either before the previous paragraph or after the next paragraph in your document. To move more than one paragraph at a time, select at least part of all paragraphs (including the end of the first paragraph you want to move and the start of the last) before pressing the ''Control+Alt+arrow'' keys.

If you are using Solaris, the key combination is ''Control+AltGr+arrow'' keys.

{{Documentation/Tip| If your paragraphs suddenly jumped from one place to another, the most likely reason is that you have accidentally pressed one of these key combinations.}}

{{Documentation/Note| In some machines the ''Control+Alt+arrow'' key combination is reserved for screen flipping. You have to deactivate or assign different key combination for screen flipping (usually through display / graphics adapter settings in your computer) before using this feature.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Cutting copying pasting text

2009-10-01T03:57:56Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Cutting, copying, and pasting text}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Selecting text
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Finding and replacing
}}__notoc__
在Write中剪下和複製文件就跟在其他應用程序剪下和複製文件是類似的。你可以在文件之間複製或移動文檔中的文字，透過拖動或使用選單圖標，或者鍵盤快捷方式。您也可以從其他來源複製文件，如網頁，並將其貼上另一個文件。

使用鼠標來移動（剪下和貼上）所選的文字，將其拖動到新的位置，並放開它。
要複製選定的文字，需按住Ctrl鍵的且同時拖動。在移動時也會保有原本格式。

選擇文字後，您可以使用滑鼠或鍵盤來執行這些動作
。
| [[Image:Cut-icon.png]]
| 剪下: 使用“ 編輯 > 剪下或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ X或工具欄上的圖標-剪下
|-
| [[Image:Copy-icon.png]]
| 複製: 使用“ 編輯 > 複製或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ C或工具欄上的圖標-複製

| [[Image:Paste-icon.png]]
| 貼上: 使用“ 編輯 > 貼上或者鍵盤快捷鍵ctrl+ C或工具欄上的圖標-貼上
|}

如果你點選貼上圖標，那文件上的格式(如粗體或斜體)會保留下來，從網站和其他來源貼上的文件也可放入框架或表格。.如果你不滿意結果，請點選圖標或取消按 Ctrl + ž。

為了使所貼上的文件格式，照原本格式貼上，請選擇：

* '''編輯 > 選擇性貼上'''
* 或點選貼上圖標右方的三角形按鍵
* 或點選標滑鼠左鍵貼上圖標

然後從結果選單中選擇無格式文件。
在貼上選單上的選擇的範圍都有所不同來源和格式的文本（或其他對象）。見下面的例子。

[[Image:Paste-submenu.png|thumb|none|500px|''Paste Special menu.'']]

This example includes the formatting option DDE link. DDE is an acronym for Dynamic Data Exchange, a mechanism whereby selected data in document ''A'' can be pasted into document ''B'' as a linked, ‘live’ copy of the original. It would be used, for example, in a report written in Writer containing time‑varying data, such as sales results sourced from a Calc spreadsheet. The DDE link ensures that, as the source spreadsheet is updated so is the report, thus reducing the scope for error and reducing the work involved in keeping the Writer document up to date.

=Moving paragraphs quickly=
With the cursor anywhere in the paragraph:

# Press and hold the ''Control+Alt'' keys.
# While holding the ''Control+Alt'' keys down, press the up-arrow or down-arrow key.

The paragraph will move to a new location either before the previous paragraph or after the next paragraph in your document. To move more than one paragraph at a time, select at least part of all paragraphs (including the end of the first paragraph you want to move and the start of the last) before pressing the ''Control+Alt+arrow'' keys.

If you are using Solaris, the key combination is ''Control+AltGr+arrow'' keys.

{{Documentation/Tip| If your paragraphs suddenly jumped from one place to another, the most likely reason is that you have accidentally pressed one of these key combinations.}}

{{Documentation/Note| In some machines the ''Control+Alt+arrow'' key combination is reserved for screen flipping. You have to deactivate or assign different key combination for screen flipping (usually through display / graphics adapter settings in your computer) before using this feature.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Hyperlinks

2009-10-01T03:10:17Z

Claire: /* Editing hyperlinks */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with hyperlinks}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Linking
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Tips and tricks
}}__notoc__
When you type text (such as a website addresses or URL) that can be used as a hyperlink, and then type a space, OOo formats the URL automatically, creating the hyperlink and applying to the text a color and underlining. If this does not happen, you can enable this feature using '''Tools > AutoCorrect > Options''' and selecting the '''URL Recognition''' checkbox.

{{Documentation/Tip|If you do not want OOo to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink, select '''Edit > Undo Insert''' from the menu bar or press ''Control+Z'' immediately after the formatting has been applied.

To change the color of hyperlinks, go to '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Appearance''', scroll to ''Unvisited links'' and/or ''Visited links'', select the checkboxes, pick the new colors and click '''OK'''. Caution: this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of OpenOffice.org—this may not be what you want.

In Writer and Calc (but not Draw or Impress), you can also change the ''Internet link'' character style or define and apply new styles to selected links.}}

==插入超連結==
您還可以使用的超連結對話框來插入和修改連結。常用工具欄上，點選超連結圖標icon [[Image:HyperlinkIcon.png]] 或者選擇插入 “> 超連結。

[[Image:Hyperlink-dialog.png|thumb|none|500px|Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links.]]

在左框中有4種超連結類型：
* '''Internet''':為網址，通常以http://開始
* '''電子郵件和新聞''':例如一個電子郵件地址。
* '''文件''': 超連結指向另一個文件，或到另一個地方的文件。
* '''開啟新檔''': 超連結建立一個新文件。

在右上角對話框部分，請根據變化選擇超連結類型。。下面是一個總結，是在演講最常見的選擇。

1.Internet超連結:超鏈接的類型（可選擇Web，FTP或Telnet），並輸入所需的網址（URL）。

2.郵件和新聞超連結:說明無論是郵件或新聞連結，接收地址和電子郵件，也是個問題。

3.文件連結:指定文件路徑（點選開檔檔案並打開一個文件瀏覽器），如果您要連結到同一文稿的特定目標。就要離開這個空格，而選擇指定的目標文件（例如，一個特定的幻燈片）。並點選圖標打開文件內的目標，您可以選擇目標，或者如果您知道名字的目標，您可以輸入框中。

4.開啟新檔超連結:可指定是否立即編輯新建立的文件或者是建立它（編輯以後）也可依文件的類型（文字，電子表格等）來建立新檔。對於演演文稿，立即編輯是最合適的選擇。請點選路徑按鈕並打開一個目錄選擇器。

另外，在該節右下角的對話框中設置對所有類型的連結，透過選擇將一些類型的連結更為相關。

* '''設定框架''' 確定如何將連結打開。這適用在文件中打開Web瀏覽器。
* '''框架''' 指定框架的連結方式是以文字或按鈕.
* '''文字''' 在文件中顯示給使用者看的文字.
* '''名稱''' 適用於HTML文件。指定文件在HTML超連結的名稱

* '''事件'''按鈕: 此按鈕將出現，是使用者針對OOo的事件作出反應寫了的一些代碼。.此功能不包括在這裡。

== 編輯超連結 ==
要編輯超鏈接，您可以在任意位置點選連結文件，或將指標定位在連結文件，然後打開超連結對話框中，或是在常用工具欄上點選連結圖標或"選擇“ 編輯 > 超連結。
(要使超連結啟動，需按住Ctrl鍵同時點選連結。）

要啟動超連結打開網址，就必須按住 Ctrl鍵並同時點選連結。當滑鼠停在超連結的文件上時，會有顯示工具提示，提醒你按下 Ctrl鍵連結。

{{Documentation/Tip|如果你需要編輯一些超鏈接，可以打開超連結對話框，直到您已經編輯所有的人。並且每一個連結都確認。當您完成後，請點選關閉。}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Getting Started (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Hyperlinks

2009-10-01T02:58:17Z

Claire: /* 插入超連結 */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with hyperlinks}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Linking
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Tips and tricks
}}__notoc__
When you type text (such as a website addresses or URL) that can be used as a hyperlink, and then type a space, OOo formats the URL automatically, creating the hyperlink and applying to the text a color and underlining. If this does not happen, you can enable this feature using '''Tools > AutoCorrect > Options''' and selecting the '''URL Recognition''' checkbox.

{{Documentation/Tip|If you do not want OOo to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink, select '''Edit > Undo Insert''' from the menu bar or press ''Control+Z'' immediately after the formatting has been applied.

To change the color of hyperlinks, go to '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Appearance''', scroll to ''Unvisited links'' and/or ''Visited links'', select the checkboxes, pick the new colors and click '''OK'''. Caution: this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of OpenOffice.org—this may not be what you want.

In Writer and Calc (but not Draw or Impress), you can also change the ''Internet link'' character style or define and apply new styles to selected links.}}

==插入超連結==
您還可以使用的超連結對話框來插入和修改連結。常用工具欄上，點選超連結圖標icon [[Image:HyperlinkIcon.png]] 或者選擇插入 “> 超連結。

[[Image:Hyperlink-dialog.png|thumb|none|500px|Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links.]]

在左框中有4種超連結類型：
* '''Internet''':為網址，通常以http://開始
* '''電子郵件和新聞''':例如一個電子郵件地址。
* '''文件''': 超連結指向另一個文件，或到另一個地方的文件。
* '''開啟新檔''': 超連結建立一個新文件。

在右上角對話框部分，請根據變化選擇超連結類型。。下面是一個總結，是在演講最常見的選擇。

1.Internet超連結:超鏈接的類型（可選擇Web，FTP或Telnet），並輸入所需的網址（URL）。

2.郵件和新聞超連結:說明無論是郵件或新聞連結，接收地址和電子郵件，也是個問題。

3.文件連結:指定文件路徑（點選開檔檔案並打開一個文件瀏覽器），如果您要連結到同一文稿的特定目標。就要離開這個空格，而選擇指定的目標文件（例如，一個特定的幻燈片）。並點選圖標打開文件內的目標，您可以選擇目標，或者如果您知道名字的目標，您可以輸入框中。

4.開啟新檔超連結:可指定是否立即編輯新建立的文件或者是建立它（編輯以後）也可依文件的類型（文字，電子表格等）來建立新檔。對於演演文稿，立即編輯是最合適的選擇。請點選路徑按鈕並打開一個目錄選擇器。

另外，在該節右下角的對話框中設置對所有類型的連結，透過選擇將一些類型的連結更為相關。

* '''設定框架''' 確定如何將連結打開。這適用在文件中打開Web瀏覽器。
* '''框架''' 指定框架的連結方式是以文字或按鈕.
* '''文字''' 在文件中顯示給使用者看的文字.
* '''名稱''' 適用於HTML文件。指定文件在HTML超連結的名稱

* '''事件'''按鈕: 此按鈕將出現，是使用者針對OOo的事件作出反應寫了的一些代碼。.此功能不包括在這裡。

== Editing hyperlinks ==
To edit a hyperlink, you can either click anywhere in the link text, or position the cursor in the link text using the arrow keys, and then open the Hyperlink dialog by clicking the '''Hyperlink '''icon on the Standard toolbar or selecting '''Edit > Hyperlink''' from the menu bar. (To activate a hyperlink, it is now necessary to hold down the ''Ctrl'' key while clicking on the link.)

To activate a hyperlink, that is, to open the URL in your default browser, it is necessary to hold down the ''Control'' key while clicking on the link. A tooltip is displayed reminding you to press the ''Control'' key when the mouse pointer hovers over the hyperlink text.

{{Documentation/Tip|If you need to edit several hyperlinks, you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them. Be sure to click '''Apply''' after each one. When you are finished, click '''Close'''.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Getting Started (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Hyperlinks

2009-10-01T02:40:54Z

Claire: /* Inserting hyperlinks */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with hyperlinks}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Linking
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Tips and tricks
}}__notoc__
When you type text (such as a website addresses or URL) that can be used as a hyperlink, and then type a space, OOo formats the URL automatically, creating the hyperlink and applying to the text a color and underlining. If this does not happen, you can enable this feature using '''Tools > AutoCorrect > Options''' and selecting the '''URL Recognition''' checkbox.

{{Documentation/Tip|If you do not want OOo to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink, select '''Edit > Undo Insert''' from the menu bar or press ''Control+Z'' immediately after the formatting has been applied.

To change the color of hyperlinks, go to '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Appearance''', scroll to ''Unvisited links'' and/or ''Visited links'', select the checkboxes, pick the new colors and click '''OK'''. Caution: this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of OpenOffice.org—this may not be what you want.

In Writer and Calc (but not Draw or Impress), you can also change the ''Internet link'' character style or define and apply new styles to selected links.}}

==插入超連結==
您還可以使用的超連結對話框來插入和修改連結。常用工具欄上，點選超連結圖標icon [[Image:HyperlinkIcon.png]] 或者選擇插入 “> 超連結。

[[Image:Hyperlink-dialog.png|thumb|none|500px|Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links.]]

在左框中有4種超連結類型：
* '''Internet''':為網址，通常以http://開始
* '''電子郵件和新聞''':例如一個電子郵件地址。
* '''文件''': 超連結指向另一個文件，或到另一個地方的文件。
* '''開啟新檔''': 超連結建立一個新文件。

在右上角對話框部分，請根據變化選擇超連結類型。。下面是一個總結，是在演講最常見的選擇。

1.Internet超連結:超鏈接的類型（可選擇Web，FTP或Telnet），並輸入所需的網址（URL）。

2.郵件和新聞超連結:說明無論是郵件或新聞連結，接收地址和電子郵件，也是個問題。

3.文件連結:指定文件路徑（點選開檔檔案並打開一個文件瀏覽器），如果您要連結到同一文稿的特定目標。就要離開這個空格，而選擇指定的目標文件（例如，一個特定的幻燈片）。並點選圖標打開文件內的目標，您可以選擇目標，或者如果您知道名字的目標，您可以輸入框中。

4.開啟新檔超連結:可指定是否立即編輯新建立的文件或者是建立它（編輯以後）也可依文件的類型（文字，電子表格等）來建立新檔。對於演演文稿，立即編輯是最合適的選擇。請點選路徑按鈕並打開一個目錄選擇器。

另外，在該節右下角的對話框中設置對所有類型的連結，透過選擇將一些類型的連結更為相關。

* Set the value of '''Frame''' to determine how the hyperlink will open. This applies to documents that open in a Web browser.
* '''Form''' specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button.
* '''Text''' specifies the text that will be visible to the user.
* '''Name''' is applicable to HTML documents. It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink.

* '''Event''' button: this button will be activated to allow OOo to react to events for which the user has written some code (macro). This function is not covered in this book.

== Editing hyperlinks ==
To edit a hyperlink, you can either click anywhere in the link text, or position the cursor in the link text using the arrow keys, and then open the Hyperlink dialog by clicking the '''Hyperlink '''icon on the Standard toolbar or selecting '''Edit > Hyperlink''' from the menu bar. (To activate a hyperlink, it is now necessary to hold down the ''Ctrl'' key while clicking on the link.)

To activate a hyperlink, that is, to open the URL in your default browser, it is necessary to hold down the ''Control'' key while clicking on the link. A tooltip is displayed reminding you to press the ''Control'' key when the mouse pointer hovers over the hyperlink text.

{{Documentation/Tip|If you need to edit several hyperlinks, you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them. Be sure to click '''Apply''' after each one. When you are finished, click '''Close'''.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Getting Started (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Format characters

2009-09-30T10:03:38Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Formatting characters}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Format paragraphs
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Autoformat
}}__notoc__
您可以在文字的按鈕格式工具欄中應用許多格式在格式工具欄，如下所示浮動工具欄(僅顯示圖標的文字格式。)

{{Documentation/Tip|我們強烈建議您使用字元樣式，而不是格式化字元。如需關於風格的資訊，以及如何使用它們，請參閱第6章（介紹樣式）。}}

[[Image:FormatToolbarChar3.png|thumb|none|600px|''The Formating toolbar, showing icons for character formatting.'']]

{|cellpadding=1
||1 樣式與格式;||9 下標
|-
||2 應用樣式||10 增加字體
|-
||3 字體名稱||11 減少字體
|-
||4 字體大小||12 字體顏色
|-
||5 粗體||13 Highlighting
|-
||6 斜體||14 背景顏色
|-
||7 底線||15 字元格式對話框
|-
||8 上標||
|-
|}

{{Documentation/Tip|要刪除手動格式，需選擇文件，然後點選格式 “> 預設格式或者滑鼠右鍵點擊並選擇預設格式。}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Format characters

2009-09-30T10:03:04Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Formatting characters}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Format paragraphs
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Autoformat
}}__notoc__
您可以在文字的按鈕格式工具欄中應用許多格式在格式工具欄，如下所示浮動工具欄(僅顯示圖標的文字格式。)

{{Documentation/Tip|我們強烈建議您使用字元樣式，而不是格式化字元。如需關於風格的資訊，以及如何使用它們，請參閱第6章（介紹樣式）。}}

[[Image:FormatToolbarChar3.png|thumb|none|600px|''The Formating toolbar, showing icons for character formatting.'']]

{|cellpadding=1
||1 樣式與格式;||9 上標
|-
||2 應用樣式||10 增加字體
|-
||3 字體名稱||11 減少字體
|-
||4 字體大小||12 字體顏色
|-
||5 粗體||13 Highlighting
|-
||6 斜體||14 背景顏色
|-
||7 底線||15 字元格式對話框
|-
||8 上標||
|-
|}

{{Documentation/Tip|要刪除手動格式，需選擇文件，然後點選格式 “> 預設格式或者滑鼠右鍵點擊並選擇預設格式。}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Format characters

2009-09-30T09:59:59Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Formatting characters}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Format paragraphs
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Autoformat
}}__notoc__
您可以在文字的按鈕格式工具欄中應用許多格式在格式工具欄，如下所示浮動工具欄(僅顯示圖標的文字格式。)

{{Documentation/Tip|我們強烈建議您使用字元樣式，而不是格式化字元。如需關於風格的資訊，以及如何使用它們，請參閱第6章（介紹樣式）。}}

[[Image:FormatToolbarChar3.png|thumb|none|600px|''The Formating toolbar, showing icons for character formatting.'']]

{|cellpadding=1
||1 樣式與格式;||9 上標
|-
||2 應用樣式||10 增加字體
|-
||3 字體名稱||11 減少字體
|-
||4 字體大小||12 字體顏色
|-
||5 粗體||13 Highlighting
|-
||6 斜體||14 背景顏色
|-
||7 底線||15 字元格式對話框
|-
||8 上標||
|-
|}

{{Documentation/Tip|To remove manual formatting, select the text and click '''Format > Default Formatting''' or right-click and select '''Default Formatting''' from the pop-up menu.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Merging splitting cells

2009-09-30T09:42:11Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Merging and splitting cells}}
{{Documentation/WG3TablesTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Resizing positioning rows columns
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Borders backgrounds boundaries
}}__notoc__

若要合併儲存格至另一個儲存格:
# 選擇儲存格合併
# 點選滑鼠右鍵並選擇儲存格/合併或選擇表格>”合併儲存格。

若儲存格要分割成多個儲存格:

# 指標位置移至儲存格
# 點選滑鼠右鍵並選擇儲存格/分割或選擇表格>”分割儲存格。
# 如何分割儲存格。一個儲存格可以水平（創造更多的列）或垂直（創造更多的欄），你可以指定表格中的儲存格量

在最後的佈局格式中這通常是一個很好的規則，用來執行合併和分割儲存格。這是因為有些操作，如刪除一列或欄產生的結果，也很難預測何時應用在表中合併或分割儲存格。

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Resizing positioning rows columns

2009-09-30T09:20:04Z

Claire: /* Inserting rows and columns */

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Resizing, positioning, and inserting rows and columns}}
{{Documentation/WG3TablesTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Table resizing positioning
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Merging splitting cells
}}__notoc__
== Resizing rows and columns ==
You can adjust the height of rows and the width of columns in a table in several ways.

* Move the mouse next to the edge of the cell and when a double-headed arrow appears, click and hold the left mouse button, drag the border to the desired position, and release the mouse button.
* On the horizontal ruler, column dividers are marked by a pair of thin gray lines; the vertical ruler indicates row dividers in the same way. You can resize a row or column by holding the mouse button down on the appropriate divider and dragging it to the desired location.
* Use the keyboard as described below.

Selecting '''Table > Autofit '''from the main menu also offers some resizing options:

* The '''Optimal Column Width''' or '''Optimal Row Height''' options make the columns or rows as narrow as possible while still fitting their contents.
* Columns and rows can be distributed evenly to quickly bring them back to all being the same width or height.

For greater control over the width of each column, use the ''Columns'' page of the Table Format dialog box.

[[Image:WG9-7.png|thumb|none|500px|''Table Format dialog box: Columns page'']]

Right-click on the table and select '''Table''' from the pop-up menu or select '''Table > Table Properties''' from the menu bar. On the ''Table Format'' dialog box, select the '''Columns''' tab.

* ''Adapt table width'': If a table already stretches to the page margins, it cannot stretch any wider and the ''Adapt table width'' option is not available. If the table is narrower, increasing the width of a column will increase the width of the whole table.

If the table width already extends pasts the margins with the ''Adapt table width'' option checked, attempting to change a column width will automatically decrease that column’s size so that the table will now shrink to the page margins while keeping any other column sizes intact.

* ''Adjust columns proportionally'' results in all columns changing their widths by the same percentage when one is changed. For example, if you reduce by half the size of a column, all the other columns sizes will be halved.
* ''Remaining space'' shows how much further the table can expand before hitting the limit of the margins. This value cannot be edited and will not be negative in the event that the table width is already larger than the space between the left and right margins.
* Under ''Column width'', each individual column can be adjusted. If you have more than six columns, use the arrows at the right and left to view them all.

Rather than start from the Table Format dialog box, it is often more efficient to make rough adjustments to a new table using the mouse, and then fine tune the layout using the ''Columns'' page in conjunction with the ''Table'' page of the ''Table Format'' dialog box.

It is also possible to resize a table using only the keyboard. This is on occasions easier than using the mouse.

# Place the cursor on the cell whose size you want to change.
# Press and hold the ''Alt'' key while using the arrow keys to change the size.

To adjust the resizing parameters and behavior for keyboard handling, select '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org Writer > Table'''.

Use the ''Row'' and ''Column'' values in the ''Move cells'' section to determine the amount of change produced by a single keystroke while resizing. In the ''Behavior of rows/columns'' section you can choose one of the following three strategies when resizing:

* ''Fixed'': select this if you want the resizing to only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. The width of the table does not change when resizing its cells.
* ''Fixed, proportional'': when resizing a cell with this option selected, all the other cells are also resized proportionally, Also in this case the width of the table remains constant.
* ''Variable'': this is the default value. Resizing a cell affects the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases.

== 插入欄與列 ==
若要插入欄或列：

# 將指標放在您要添加新欄或列的位置，然後右鍵點擊
# 在彈出的選單中，選擇欄>“插入或列>”插入。您可以選擇行數或列添加，以及它們出現欄或列之前或之後。
# 設定欄數或列插入，和位置之前或之後
# 點選確定並關閉對話框

{{Documentation/Note| Clicking on the '''Insert Row''' icon on the Table toolbar inserts one row ''below'' the selected one. Clicking on the '''Insert Column''' icon on the Table toolbar inserts a column ''after'' (''to the right of'') the selected one.

Regardless of how they are inserted, new rows or columns have the same formatting as the row or column where the cursor was when the insert command was issued.}}

你還可以只使用快捷鍵快速插入一行或一列：

# 將指標放在想要插入的欄或列旁邊。
# 使用 Alt +插入按鍵組合操作。
# 使用箭頭鍵增加行或列：

''Left'' 在指標左側的儲存格的位置插入一個新列。

''Right'' 在指標右側的儲存格的位置插入一個新列。

''Down'' 在指標下側的儲存格的位置插入一個新列。

''Up'' 在指標上側的儲存格的位置插入一個新列。

上面的方法也可以用來刪除欄或列，也就是以ALT + DELETE鍵代替在步驟2的 Alt +插入按鍵組合在。

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Creating a table

2009-09-30T08:59:19Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating a table}}
{{Documentation/WG3TablesTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Working with Tables
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Formatting table layout
}}__notoc__
Before you insert a table into a document, it helps to have an idea of the visual result you want to obtain as well as an estimate of the number of rows and columns required. Every parameter can be changed at a later stage; however, thinking ahead can save a large amount of time as changes to fully formatted tables often require a significant effort.

== 插入新表格 ==
若要插入一個新表格，需將指標定位在要顯示的位置，然後使用下列任何一種方法來打開插入表格對話框：

* 從主選單中，選擇表>“插入>”表格
* 按 Ctrl + F12鍵 .
* 從標準工具欄，點選表圖標 [[Image:TableIcon.png]]

[[Image:WG9-2.png|thumb|none|500px|''使用插入表格對話框插入一個新表格。'']]

Here you can specify the properties for the new table.

Under ''Name'', you can enter a different name than the OOo-generated default for the table. This might come in handy when using the Navigator to quickly jump to a table.

Under ''Size'', specify the initial number of columns and rows for the new table. You can change the size of the table later, if necessary.

Under ''Options'', set up the initial table characteristics. Selecting the options in this section of the dialog produces the following results:

* '''Heading''' — Defines the first row(s) in the table as headings. The default ''Table Heading'' paragraph style is applied to the heading rows and thus makes the text centered, bold, and italic. You can edit the OOo-predefined ''Table Heading'' paragraph style in the Styles and Formatting window to change these default settings. When splitting a table into two tables, the Heading row(s) are copied in the second table.
* '''Repeat heading''' — Repeats the heading row(s) of the table at the top of subsequent pages if the table spans more than one page. ''The first ... rows'' —Specifies the number of rows to be repeated. Default is 1.
* '''Don’t split table''' — Prevents the table from spanning more than one page. This can be useful if the table starts near the end of a page, and would look better if it were completely located on the following page. If the table becomes longer than would fit on one page, you will need to either deselect this option or manually split the table.
* '''Border''''' ''— Surrounds each cell of the table with a border. This border can be modified or deleted later.

The '''AutoFormat''' button opens a dialog from where it is possible to select one of the many predefined table layouts. See [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Formatting table layout#Automatic formatting of tables|Automatic formatting of tables]] for more information.

After making your choices, click '''OK'''. Writer creates a table as wide as the text area (from the left page margin to the right page margin), with all columns the same width and all rows the same height. You can then adjust the columns and rows later to suit your needs.

{{Documentation/Tip| To directly insert a table with the default properties, click on the little arrow next to the Table icon on the Standard toolbar. A graphic appears where you can choose the table’s size (rows and columns). To create the table, click on the cell that you want to be on the last row of the last column. Holding down the mouse button over the Table icon will also display the graphic.}}

== Creating nested tables ==
You can create tables within tables, nested to a depth only limited by imagination and practicality. The figure below demonstrates a simple, two-level example.

To achieve this, simply click in a cell of an existing table and use any of the methods mentioned in [[#Inserting a new table|Inserting a new table]] above.

[[Image:WG9-3.png|thumb|none|500px|''Nested table example. The shaded table is nested in a cell of the larger table.'']]

== Using AutoCorrect to create a table ==
You can also create a table by typing a series of hyphens (-) or tabs separated by plus signs. Use the plus signs to indicate column dividers, while hyphens and tabs are used to indicate the width of a column.

For example, this character sequence:

+-----------------+---------------+------+

creates a table like this:

[[Image:WG9-x.png]]

{{Documentation/Note| This function can be disabled or enabled in '''Tools > AutoCorrect'''. On the ''Options'' tab, deselect or select '''Create table'''.}}

{{Documentation/Caution| When using tabs instead of a table to line up your data, always make sure that you know how wide they are set and remember that default tabs may be different when the document is displayed on a different computer or even when copying the same data in a new document.}}

=== Create a table from formatted text ===
It is possible to create a table starting from plain text by means of the '''Table > Convert > Text to Table''' menu. In order for this command to work effectively, the starting text needs to have clear demarcation between what will become the columns of the table. Paragraph marks indicate the end of a row.

To convert text to a table, start by selecting the text you want to convert and select '''Table > Convert > Text to Table '''to open the dialog box shown below.

[[Image:TextToTable.png|thumb|none|500px|''Dialog box to configure the text to table conversion'']]

In the top part of the dialog box, select the symbol that separates the columns. This would normally be a tab, but it could be a semicolon or comma if you are importing a CSV file. The other options in this dialog are the same as those in the dialog used to insert a table shown in Figure 1.

=== Example ===
In this example we will convert the following text into a table.

'''Row 1 Column 1; Row 1 Column 2; Row 1 Column 3'''

'''Row 2 Column 1; Row 2 Column 2; Row 2 Column 3'''

In this case, the separator between elements is a semicolon. By selecting the text and applying the conversion, we obtain the following result.

{| class="prettytable"
| Row 1 Column 1
| Row 1 Column 2
| Row 1 Column 3

|-
| Row 2 Column 1
| Row 2 Column 2
| Row 2 Column 3

|}
Note that, unlike when creating a table with other mechanisms, the conversion from text to table preserves the paragraph style applied to the original text.

You can also use the '''Convert''' menu to perform the opposite operation; that is, to transform a table into plain text. This may be useful when you want to export the table contents into a different program.

To transform a table into text, place the cursor anywhere in the table, select '''Table > Convert > Table to Text''' in the main menu, pick the preferred row separator, and click '''OK''' to finish.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Numbered bulleted lists

2009-09-30T08:48:51Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating numbered or bulleted lists}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Autoformat
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Footnotes and endnotes
}}__notoc__
有幾種方法來建立編號或項目符號列表：

* 使用autoformatting。
* 使用列表樣式，所述第7章（使用樣式）。
* 使用編號和項目符號圖標的段落格式工具欄。這最後一種方法是這裡介紹。

為了產生一個編號或項目符號在列表中，請選擇段落的列表，然後在工具欄上點選相應的圖標

{{Documentation/Note|這是個人喜好的問題，您是否先輸入您的訊息，然後申請編號/項，或是當您使用樣式時加入。}}

== 使用項目符號和編號欄 ==
您可以建立含套件列表（其中一個或多個列表項下有一個子列表，如大綱）並使用按鈕的項目符號和編號的工具欄。您可以移動符號上下的列表，或建立subpoints，甚至改變編號、項目的樣式。使用查看 “> 工具欄 ”> 項目符號和編號

[[Image:Bullets_number_toolbar3.png|thumb|none|500px|''Bullets and Numbering toolbar.'']]

{|cellpadding=2
||1 項目符號||8 插入編號
|-
||2 編號 ||9 上移
|-
||3 關閉編號||10 下降
|-
||4 上一層||11 移動上 Subpoints
|-
||5 下一層||12 移動下 Subpoints
|-
||6 移動上一層 Subpoints||13 重新編號
|-
||7 移動上一層 Subpoints  ||14 項目符號與編號
|-
|}

{{Documentation/Tip| It is possible to move a list entry up, together with all of its sub-entries. Do this by clicking the '''Promote One Level With Subpoints''' button.}}

If you create a nested list using the predefined styles, all the levels of the list (up to 10) apply the same numbering (or bullet), however in many circumstances you will want to use a combination of numbering formats and bullets when creating nested lists. Such lists with a mixture of numbering formats and bullets can be easily configured as described in the following example. Additional information on lists and in particular the technique to create your own list style is described in [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Working with Styles|Chapter 7]] (Working with Styles).

{{Documentation/Tip| When creating nested lists one option is to enter all the list paragraphs first and apply the levels afterwards.

You can use keyboard shortcuts to move paragraphs up or down the outline levels. Place the cursor at the beginning of the numbered paragraph and press: ''Tab''        Down a level ''Shift+Tab''    Up a level

To insert a tab stop at the beginning of a numbered paragraph (that is, after the number but before the text), press ''Control+Tab''.}}

== Example: 配置套件列表 ==
我們使用一個編號樣式並產生以下影響:

<pre>
I. Level-1 list item

A. Level-2 list item

i. Level-3 list item

a) Level-4 list item
</pre>

本範例使用提供的樣式，編號1，但是如果你打算再用這種類型的套件列表，您還可以創建一個新的作風，說明在第7章（使用樣式）。

<ol>
<li>建立項目，並運用編號1樣式和格式。</li>
<li>選擇格式 “> 項目符號和編號打開對話框，用它控制外觀列表</li>
<li>轉到大綱頁面，在這裡你會發現，有一種風格符合我們的要求。並點選該樣式</li>

[[Image:PredefNumStyle.png|thumb|none|500px|''Choosing a predefined outline-numbering style'']]

<li>要修改列表樣式，請使用選項。在級別框左側，選擇1，然後2，3，4，看看資料，編號變化。
使用選項置不同的標點符號，例如，一個句點（句號）在“1”的第4級，而不是一個括號。</li>

[[Image:Level1List.png|thumb|none|500px|''Checking the outline numbering for level-1 list items'']]

[[Image:Level2List.png|thumb|none|500px|''Numbering style for level-2 list items'']]

為了使每一級縮排大於或小於預設的，將更改頁面上的位置。選擇層級，然後進行更改縮排，間距，或編號一致。

<li>重複各層次需要，然後點選確定 </li>
</ol>

{{Documentation/Tip| With outline numbering you can define different bullet styles for the different levels of a bullet list. Use the ''Bullets'' tab of the Bullets and Numbering dialog box (not shown) to select the basic style. Return to the ''Options'' tab to customize the bullet for each indent level. Here you can set bullets to any character. See the ''Graphics'' tab for more bullets.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Numbered bulleted lists

2009-09-30T08:35:30Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating numbered or bulleted lists}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Autoformat
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Footnotes and endnotes
}}__notoc__
有幾種方法來建立編號或項目符號列表：

* 使用autoformatting。
* 使用列表樣式，所述第7章（使用樣式）。
* 使用編號和項目符號圖標的段落格式工具欄。這最後一種方法是這裡介紹。

為了產生一個編號或項目符號在列表中，請選擇段落的列表，然後在工具欄上點選相應的圖標

{{Documentation/Note|這是個人喜好的問題，您是否先輸入您的訊息，然後申請編號/項，或是當您使用樣式時加入。}}

== 使用項目符號和編號欄 ==
您可以建立含套件列表（其中一個或多個列表項下有一個子列表，如大綱）並使用按鈕的項目符號和編號的工具欄。您可以移動符號上下的列表，或建立subpoints，甚至改變編號、項目的樣式。使用查看 “> 工具欄 ”> 項目符號和編號

[[Image:Bullets_number_toolbar3.png|thumb|none|500px|''Bullets and Numbering toolbar.'']]

{|cellpadding=2
||1 項目符號||8 插入編號
|-
||2 編號 ||9 上移
|-
||3 關閉編號||10 下降
|-
||4 上一層||11 移動上 Subpoints
|-
||5 下一層||12 移動下 Subpoints
|-
||6 移動上一層 Subpoints||13 重新編號
|-
||7 移動上一層 Subpoints  ||14 項目符號與編號
|-
|}

{{Documentation/Tip| It is possible to move a list entry up, together with all of its sub-entries. Do this by clicking the '''Promote One Level With Subpoints''' button.}}

If you create a nested list using the predefined styles, all the levels of the list (up to 10) apply the same numbering (or bullet), however in many circumstances you will want to use a combination of numbering formats and bullets when creating nested lists. Such lists with a mixture of numbering formats and bullets can be easily configured as described in the following example. Additional information on lists and in particular the technique to create your own list style is described in [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Working with Styles|Chapter 7]] (Working with Styles).

{{Documentation/Tip| When creating nested lists one option is to enter all the list paragraphs first and apply the levels afterwards.

You can use keyboard shortcuts to move paragraphs up or down the outline levels. Place the cursor at the beginning of the numbered paragraph and press: ''Tab''        Down a level ''Shift+Tab''    Up a level

To insert a tab stop at the beginning of a numbered paragraph (that is, after the number but before the text), press ''Control+Tab''.}}

== Example: configuring a nested list ==
We will use a numbering style to produce the following effect:

<pre>
I. Level-1 list item

A. Level-2 list item

i. Level-3 list item

a) Level-4 list item
</pre>

This example uses one of the supplied styles, ''Numbering 1'', however if you intend to reuse this type of nested list you can also create a new style as illustrated in [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Working with Styles|Chapter 7]] (Working with Styles).

<ol>
<li>Create the first item and apply the Numbering 1 style from the Styles and Formatting window.</li>
<li>Select '''Format > Bullets and Numbering''' to open the dialog that controls the appearance of the list.</li>
<li>Go to the ''Outline'' page, where you will find that one style matches our requirements. Click once on that style.</li>

[[Image:PredefNumStyle.png|thumb|none|500px|''Choosing a predefined outline-numbering style'']]

<li>To modify the layout of the list, use the ''Options'' tab. Notice that the preview on the right shows the outline selected. In the ''Level'' box on the left, select '''1''', then '''2''', '''3''', and '''4''' and see how the information in the ''Numbering'' and ''After'' boxes changes. Use the ''Options'' page to set different punctuation; for example, a period (full stop) after “a” on level 4 instead of a parenthesis.</li>

[[Image:Level1List.png|thumb|none|500px|''Checking the outline numbering for level-1 list items'']]

[[Image:Level2List.png|thumb|none|500px|''Numbering style for level-2 list items'']]

To make the indentation at each level greater or less than the default, change it on the ''Position'' page. Select the level, then make any changes in the indentation, spacing, or numbering alignment.

<li>Repeat for each level as required, then click '''OK'''.</li>
</ol>

{{Documentation/Tip| With outline numbering you can define different bullet styles for the different levels of a bullet list. Use the ''Bullets'' tab of the Bullets and Numbering dialog box (not shown) to select the basic style. Return to the ''Options'' tab to customize the bullet for each indent level. Here you can set bullets to any character. See the ''Graphics'' tab for more bullets.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Finding and replacing

2009-09-30T08:19:32Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Finding and replacing text and formatting}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Cutting copying pasting text
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Special characters
}}__notoc__
當在3000字的文章尋找某些詞，效率可能低於手工打的每一個字。所以有了尋找和取代功能，可以自動搜索正在編輯的文件。

除了尋找和取代單詞和短語，您可以：

* 使用符號和正則表達公式來搜尋
* 尋找和取代特定格式.
* 尋找和取代段落樣式

如何顯示尋找和取代對話框，請使用鍵盤快捷鍵Ctrl + F鍵，或者選擇編輯>“尋找和取代。

# 在尋找框中輸入您要查找的資料。
# 若要替換與原本不同的文字，請取代框中輸入新文字。
# 您可以選擇不同的選項，如匹配的情況下，全字匹配，或做尋找類似的話。（見下文有其他選擇。）
# 當您設置您的尋找，點選查找。若要替換文字，就點選替代。

[[Image:FR-box.png|thumb|none|500px|''The Find & Replace dialog box'']]

{{Documentation/Tip|如果您點選全部尋找，就會整份文件。同樣，如果您點選全部替換，尋找的文字就會變成取代的文字，使用全部替換謹慎，否則，你可能會發生一些令人尷尬的錯誤，如果不是及時發現解開，取代所有錯誤可能需要手動。}}

== Use wildcards (regular expressions) ==
''Wildcards ''(also known as ''regular expressions'') are combinations of characters that instruct OOo how to search for something. Regular expressions are very powerful but not very intuitive. They can save time and effort by combining multiple finds into one.

Table 1 shows a few of the regular expressions used by OOo.

{{Documentation/Tip| The online help describes many more regular expressions and their uses.}}

{{Documentation/Note| One of the most common mistakes when using regular expressions is to try to search for a character that is defined as a wildcard, such as brackets or dots. If you need to search for such a character, type a backslash (\) before it. This instructs OOo to treat the character following the backslash as a normal character. For example, to find the text $5.00 ($ and . are wildcard characters), you would conduct a search using \$5\.00.}}

To use wildcards and regular expressions when searching and replacing:

# On the Find & Replace dialog box, click '''More Options''' to see more choices. On this expanded dialog box, select the '''Regular expressions''' option.
# Type the search text, including the wildcards, in the ''Search for'' box and the replacement text (if any) in the ''Replace with'' box. Not all regular expressions work as replacement characters; the line break (\n) is one that does work.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All''' (not recommended).

[[Image:FRMore.png|thumb|none|500px|''Expanded Find & Replace dialog box.'']]

''Table 1. Examples of search wildcards (regular expressions)''

{| class="prettytable"
! To find
! Use this expression
! Examples and comments

|-
| Any single character
| .
| b'''.'''d finds ''bad'', ''bud'', ''bid'', and ''bed''.

|-
| Characters at the beginning of a paragraph
| ^chars
| ^term

|-
| Characters at the end of a paragraph
| chars$
| term.$

|-
| One of the specified characters
| <nowiki>[xyz]</nowiki>
| b<nowiki>[iu]</nowiki>n finds ''bin'' and ''bun''.

|-
| Any single character in this range
| <nowiki>[x-y]</nowiki>
| <nowiki>[r-t]</nowiki>eed finds ''reed'', ''seed'', and ''teed''<nowiki>; ranges must be in alphabetically ascending order.</nowiki>

|-
| Any single character except the characters inside the brackets
| <nowiki>[^x]</nowiki>
| p<nowiki>[^a]</nowiki>st finds ''post'' and ''pest'', but not past.

|-
| The beginning of a word
| <nowiki>\<start</nowiki>
| <nowiki>\<log</nowiki> finds ''logbook'' and ''logistics'', but not ''catalog''.

|-
| The end of a word
| end\>
| log\> finds ''catalog'', but not ''logistics''.

|-
| A paragraph marker
| $
| Does not work as a replacement character. Use '''\n''' instead.

|-
| An empty paragraph
| ^$
|

|-
| An tab character
| \t
|

|-
| A line break
| \n
| Finds a line break that was inserted with ''Shift+Enter''. When used as a replacement character, it inserts a paragraph marker.

|}

== Find and replace specific formatting ==
A very powerful use of Find & Replace takes advantage of the format option. For example, you might want to replace underlined words with italics.

On the Find & Replace dialog box with '''More Options''' displayed:

# To search for text with specific formatting, enter the text in the ''Search for'' box. To search for specific formatting only, delete any text in the ''Search for'' box.
# Click '''Format''' to display the Text Format (Search) dialog box. The tabs on this dialog box are similar to those on the Paragraph format and Paragraph Style dialog boxes. Choose the formats you want to search for and then click '''OK'''. The names of selected formats appear under the ''Search for'' box. For example, you might search for all text in 14-point bold Helvetica.
# To replace text, enter the replacement text in the ''Replace with'' box. To search for specific text with specific formatting (for example, the word '''hello''' in bold), specify the formatting, put the text in the ''Search for'' box and leave the ''Replace with'' box blank.>br />To remove specific character formatting, click '''Format''', select the '''Font''' tab, then select the opposite format (for example, No Bold). The '''No Format''' button on the Find & Replace dialog box clears all previously selected formats.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{Documentation/Tip| Unless you plan to search for other text using those same attributes, click '''No Format''' to remove the attributes after completing your search. If you forget to do this, you may wonder why your next search fails to find words you know are in the document.}}

== Find and replace paragraph styles ==
If you combine material from several sources, you may discover that lots of unwanted paragraph styles have suddenly shown up in your document. To quickly change all the paragraphs of one (unwanted) style to another (preferred) style:

# On the expanded Find & Replace dialog box, select '''Search for Styles'''. (If you have attributes specified, this option is labeled ''Including Styles''.) The'' Search for'' and ''Replace with'' boxes now contain a list of styles.
# Select the styles you want to search for and replace.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Finding and replacing

2009-09-30T08:16:31Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Finding and replacing text and formatting}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Cutting copying pasting text
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Special characters
}}__notoc__
當在3000字的文章尋找某些詞，效率可能低於手工打的每一個字。所以有了尋找和取代功能，可以自動搜索正在編輯的文件。

除了尋找和取代單詞和短語，您可以：

* 使用符號和正則表達公式來搜尋
* 尋找和取代特定格式.
* 尋找和取代段落樣式

如何顯示尋找和取代對話框，請使用鍵盤快捷鍵Ctrl + F鍵，或者選擇編輯>“尋找和取代。

# 在尋找框中輸入您要查找的資料。
# 若要替換與原本不同的文字，請取代框中輸入新文字。
# 您可以選擇不同的選項，如匹配的情況下，全字匹配，或做尋找類似的話。（見下文有其他選擇。）
# 當您設置您的尋找，點選查找。若要替換文字，就點選替代。

[[Image:FR-box.png|thumb|none|500px|''The Find & Replace dialog box'']]

{{Documentation/Tip| 如果您點選全部尋找，就會整份文件。同樣，如果您點選全部替換，尋找的文字就會變成取代的文字，如果不是及時發現解開，取代所有錯誤可能需要手動。}}

== Use wildcards (regular expressions) ==
''Wildcards ''(also known as ''regular expressions'') are combinations of characters that instruct OOo how to search for something. Regular expressions are very powerful but not very intuitive. They can save time and effort by combining multiple finds into one.

Table 1 shows a few of the regular expressions used by OOo.

{{Documentation/Tip| The online help describes many more regular expressions and their uses.}}

{{Documentation/Note| One of the most common mistakes when using regular expressions is to try to search for a character that is defined as a wildcard, such as brackets or dots. If you need to search for such a character, type a backslash (\) before it. This instructs OOo to treat the character following the backslash as a normal character. For example, to find the text $5.00 ($ and . are wildcard characters), you would conduct a search using \$5\.00.}}

To use wildcards and regular expressions when searching and replacing:

# On the Find & Replace dialog box, click '''More Options''' to see more choices. On this expanded dialog box, select the '''Regular expressions''' option.
# Type the search text, including the wildcards, in the ''Search for'' box and the replacement text (if any) in the ''Replace with'' box. Not all regular expressions work as replacement characters; the line break (\n) is one that does work.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All''' (not recommended).

[[Image:FRMore.png|thumb|none|500px|''Expanded Find & Replace dialog box.'']]

''Table 1. Examples of search wildcards (regular expressions)''

{| class="prettytable"
! To find
! Use this expression
! Examples and comments

|-
| Any single character
| .
| b'''.'''d finds ''bad'', ''bud'', ''bid'', and ''bed''.

|-
| Characters at the beginning of a paragraph
| ^chars
| ^term

|-
| Characters at the end of a paragraph
| chars$
| term.$

|-
| One of the specified characters
| <nowiki>[xyz]</nowiki>
| b<nowiki>[iu]</nowiki>n finds ''bin'' and ''bun''.

|-
| Any single character in this range
| <nowiki>[x-y]</nowiki>
| <nowiki>[r-t]</nowiki>eed finds ''reed'', ''seed'', and ''teed''<nowiki>; ranges must be in alphabetically ascending order.</nowiki>

|-
| Any single character except the characters inside the brackets
| <nowiki>[^x]</nowiki>
| p<nowiki>[^a]</nowiki>st finds ''post'' and ''pest'', but not past.

|-
| The beginning of a word
| <nowiki>\<start</nowiki>
| <nowiki>\<log</nowiki> finds ''logbook'' and ''logistics'', but not ''catalog''.

|-
| The end of a word
| end\>
| log\> finds ''catalog'', but not ''logistics''.

|-
| A paragraph marker
| $
| Does not work as a replacement character. Use '''\n''' instead.

|-
| An empty paragraph
| ^$
|

|-
| An tab character
| \t
|

|-
| A line break
| \n
| Finds a line break that was inserted with ''Shift+Enter''. When used as a replacement character, it inserts a paragraph marker.

|}

== Find and replace specific formatting ==
A very powerful use of Find & Replace takes advantage of the format option. For example, you might want to replace underlined words with italics.

On the Find & Replace dialog box with '''More Options''' displayed:

# To search for text with specific formatting, enter the text in the ''Search for'' box. To search for specific formatting only, delete any text in the ''Search for'' box.
# Click '''Format''' to display the Text Format (Search) dialog box. The tabs on this dialog box are similar to those on the Paragraph format and Paragraph Style dialog boxes. Choose the formats you want to search for and then click '''OK'''. The names of selected formats appear under the ''Search for'' box. For example, you might search for all text in 14-point bold Helvetica.
# To replace text, enter the replacement text in the ''Replace with'' box. To search for specific text with specific formatting (for example, the word '''hello''' in bold), specify the formatting, put the text in the ''Search for'' box and leave the ''Replace with'' box blank.>br />To remove specific character formatting, click '''Format''', select the '''Font''' tab, then select the opposite format (for example, No Bold). The '''No Format''' button on the Find & Replace dialog box clears all previously selected formats.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{Documentation/Tip| Unless you plan to search for other text using those same attributes, click '''No Format''' to remove the attributes after completing your search. If you forget to do this, you may wonder why your next search fails to find words you know are in the document.}}

== Find and replace paragraph styles ==
If you combine material from several sources, you may discover that lots of unwanted paragraph styles have suddenly shown up in your document. To quickly change all the paragraphs of one (unwanted) style to another (preferred) style:

# On the expanded Find & Replace dialog box, select '''Search for Styles'''. (If you have attributes specified, this option is labeled ''Including Styles''.) The'' Search for'' and ''Replace with'' boxes now contain a list of styles.
# Select the styles you want to search for and replace.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Finding and replacing

2009-09-30T08:15:56Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Finding and replacing text and formatting}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Cutting copying pasting text
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Special characters
}}__notoc__
當在3000字的文章尋找某些詞，效率可能低於手工打的每一個字。所以有了尋找和取代功能，可以自動搜索正在編輯的文件。

除了尋找和取代單詞和短語，您可以：

* 使用符號和正則表達公式來搜尋
* 尋找和取代特定格式.
* 尋找和取代段落樣式

如何顯示尋找和取代對話框，請使用鍵盤快捷鍵Ctrl + F鍵，或者選擇編輯>“尋找和取代。

# 在尋找框中輸入您要查找的資料。
# 若要替換與原本不同的文字，請取代框中輸入新文字。
# 您可以選擇不同的選項，如匹配的情況下，全字匹配，或做尋找類似的話。（見下文有其他選擇。）
# 當您設置您的尋找，點選查找。若要替換文字，就點選替代。

[[Image:FR-box.png|thumb|none|500px|''The Find & Replace dialog box'']]

{{Documentation/Tip|如果您點選全部尋找，就會整份文件。同樣，如果您點選全部替換，尋找的文字就會變成取代的文字，如果不是及時發現解開，取代所有錯誤可能需要手動。}}

== Use wildcards (regular expressions) ==
''Wildcards ''(also known as ''regular expressions'') are combinations of characters that instruct OOo how to search for something. Regular expressions are very powerful but not very intuitive. They can save time and effort by combining multiple finds into one.

Table 1 shows a few of the regular expressions used by OOo.

{{Documentation/Tip| The online help describes many more regular expressions and their uses.}}

{{Documentation/Note| One of the most common mistakes when using regular expressions is to try to search for a character that is defined as a wildcard, such as brackets or dots. If you need to search for such a character, type a backslash (\) before it. This instructs OOo to treat the character following the backslash as a normal character. For example, to find the text $5.00 ($ and . are wildcard characters), you would conduct a search using \$5\.00.}}

To use wildcards and regular expressions when searching and replacing:

# On the Find & Replace dialog box, click '''More Options''' to see more choices. On this expanded dialog box, select the '''Regular expressions''' option.
# Type the search text, including the wildcards, in the ''Search for'' box and the replacement text (if any) in the ''Replace with'' box. Not all regular expressions work as replacement characters; the line break (\n) is one that does work.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All''' (not recommended).

[[Image:FRMore.png|thumb|none|500px|''Expanded Find & Replace dialog box.'']]

''Table 1. Examples of search wildcards (regular expressions)''

{| class="prettytable"
! To find
! Use this expression
! Examples and comments

|-
| Any single character
| .
| b'''.'''d finds ''bad'', ''bud'', ''bid'', and ''bed''.

|-
| Characters at the beginning of a paragraph
| ^chars
| ^term

|-
| Characters at the end of a paragraph
| chars$
| term.$

|-
| One of the specified characters
| <nowiki>[xyz]</nowiki>
| b<nowiki>[iu]</nowiki>n finds ''bin'' and ''bun''.

|-
| Any single character in this range
| <nowiki>[x-y]</nowiki>
| <nowiki>[r-t]</nowiki>eed finds ''reed'', ''seed'', and ''teed''<nowiki>; ranges must be in alphabetically ascending order.</nowiki>

|-
| Any single character except the characters inside the brackets
| <nowiki>[^x]</nowiki>
| p<nowiki>[^a]</nowiki>st finds ''post'' and ''pest'', but not past.

|-
| The beginning of a word
| <nowiki>\<start</nowiki>
| <nowiki>\<log</nowiki> finds ''logbook'' and ''logistics'', but not ''catalog''.

|-
| The end of a word
| end\>
| log\> finds ''catalog'', but not ''logistics''.

|-
| A paragraph marker
| $
| Does not work as a replacement character. Use '''\n''' instead.

|-
| An empty paragraph
| ^$
|

|-
| An tab character
| \t
|

|-
| A line break
| \n
| Finds a line break that was inserted with ''Shift+Enter''. When used as a replacement character, it inserts a paragraph marker.

|}

== Find and replace specific formatting ==
A very powerful use of Find & Replace takes advantage of the format option. For example, you might want to replace underlined words with italics.

On the Find & Replace dialog box with '''More Options''' displayed:

# To search for text with specific formatting, enter the text in the ''Search for'' box. To search for specific formatting only, delete any text in the ''Search for'' box.
# Click '''Format''' to display the Text Format (Search) dialog box. The tabs on this dialog box are similar to those on the Paragraph format and Paragraph Style dialog boxes. Choose the formats you want to search for and then click '''OK'''. The names of selected formats appear under the ''Search for'' box. For example, you might search for all text in 14-point bold Helvetica.
# To replace text, enter the replacement text in the ''Replace with'' box. To search for specific text with specific formatting (for example, the word '''hello''' in bold), specify the formatting, put the text in the ''Search for'' box and leave the ''Replace with'' box blank.>br />To remove specific character formatting, click '''Format''', select the '''Font''' tab, then select the opposite format (for example, No Bold). The '''No Format''' button on the Find & Replace dialog box clears all previously selected formats.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{Documentation/Tip| Unless you plan to search for other text using those same attributes, click '''No Format''' to remove the attributes after completing your search. If you forget to do this, you may wonder why your next search fails to find words you know are in the document.}}

== Find and replace paragraph styles ==
If you combine material from several sources, you may discover that lots of unwanted paragraph styles have suddenly shown up in your document. To quickly change all the paragraphs of one (unwanted) style to another (preferred) style:

# On the expanded Find & Replace dialog box, select '''Search for Styles'''. (If you have attributes specified, this option is labeled ''Including Styles''.) The'' Search for'' and ''Replace with'' boxes now contain a list of styles.
# Select the styles you want to search for and replace.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Writer Guide/Finding and replacing

2009-09-30T08:12:02Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Finding and replacing text and formatting}}
{{Documentation/WG3TextTOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Cutting copying pasting text
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Writer Guide/Special characters
}}__notoc__
當在3000字的文章尋找某些詞，效率可能低於手工打的每一個字。所以有了尋找和取代功能，可以自動搜索正在編輯的文件。

除了尋找和取代單詞和短語，您可以：

* 使用符號和正則表達公式來搜尋
* 尋找和取代特定格式.
* 尋找和取代段落樣式

如何顯示尋找和取代對話框，請使用鍵盤快捷鍵Ctrl + F鍵，或者選擇編輯>“尋找和取代。

# 在尋找框中輸入您要查找的資料。
# 若要替換與原本不同的文字，請取代框中輸入新文字。
# 您可以選擇不同的選項，如匹配的情況下，全字匹配，或做尋找類似的話。（見下文有其他選擇。）
# 當您設置您的尋找，點選查找。若要替換文字，就點選替代。

[[Image:FR-box.png|thumb|none|500px|''The Find & Replace dialog box'']]

{{Documentation/Tip|如果您點選全部尋找，就會整份文件。同樣，如果您點選全部替換，尋找的文字就會變成取代的文字}}

{{Documentation/Caution| Use '''Replace All''' with caution; otherwise, you may end up with some hilarious (and highly embarrassing) mistakes. A mistake with '''Replace All''' might require a manual, word-by-word, search to fix, if not discovered in time to undo.}}

== Use wildcards (regular expressions) ==
''Wildcards ''(also known as ''regular expressions'') are combinations of characters that instruct OOo how to search for something. Regular expressions are very powerful but not very intuitive. They can save time and effort by combining multiple finds into one.

Table 1 shows a few of the regular expressions used by OOo.

{{Documentation/Tip| The online help describes many more regular expressions and their uses.}}

{{Documentation/Note| One of the most common mistakes when using regular expressions is to try to search for a character that is defined as a wildcard, such as brackets or dots. If you need to search for such a character, type a backslash (\) before it. This instructs OOo to treat the character following the backslash as a normal character. For example, to find the text $5.00 ($ and . are wildcard characters), you would conduct a search using \$5\.00.}}

To use wildcards and regular expressions when searching and replacing:

# On the Find & Replace dialog box, click '''More Options''' to see more choices. On this expanded dialog box, select the '''Regular expressions''' option.
# Type the search text, including the wildcards, in the ''Search for'' box and the replacement text (if any) in the ''Replace with'' box. Not all regular expressions work as replacement characters; the line break (\n) is one that does work.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All''' (not recommended).

[[Image:FRMore.png|thumb|none|500px|''Expanded Find & Replace dialog box.'']]

''Table 1. Examples of search wildcards (regular expressions)''

{| class="prettytable"
! To find
! Use this expression
! Examples and comments

|-
| Any single character
| .
| b'''.'''d finds ''bad'', ''bud'', ''bid'', and ''bed''.

|-
| Characters at the beginning of a paragraph
| ^chars
| ^term

|-
| Characters at the end of a paragraph
| chars$
| term.$

|-
| One of the specified characters
| <nowiki>[xyz]</nowiki>
| b<nowiki>[iu]</nowiki>n finds ''bin'' and ''bun''.

|-
| Any single character in this range
| <nowiki>[x-y]</nowiki>
| <nowiki>[r-t]</nowiki>eed finds ''reed'', ''seed'', and ''teed''<nowiki>; ranges must be in alphabetically ascending order.</nowiki>

|-
| Any single character except the characters inside the brackets
| <nowiki>[^x]</nowiki>
| p<nowiki>[^a]</nowiki>st finds ''post'' and ''pest'', but not past.

|-
| The beginning of a word
| <nowiki>\<start</nowiki>
| <nowiki>\<log</nowiki> finds ''logbook'' and ''logistics'', but not ''catalog''.

|-
| The end of a word
| end\>
| log\> finds ''catalog'', but not ''logistics''.

|-
| A paragraph marker
| $
| Does not work as a replacement character. Use '''\n''' instead.

|-
| An empty paragraph
| ^$
|

|-
| An tab character
| \t
|

|-
| A line break
| \n
| Finds a line break that was inserted with ''Shift+Enter''. When used as a replacement character, it inserts a paragraph marker.

|}

== Find and replace specific formatting ==
A very powerful use of Find & Replace takes advantage of the format option. For example, you might want to replace underlined words with italics.

On the Find & Replace dialog box with '''More Options''' displayed:

# To search for text with specific formatting, enter the text in the ''Search for'' box. To search for specific formatting only, delete any text in the ''Search for'' box.
# Click '''Format''' to display the Text Format (Search) dialog box. The tabs on this dialog box are similar to those on the Paragraph format and Paragraph Style dialog boxes. Choose the formats you want to search for and then click '''OK'''. The names of selected formats appear under the ''Search for'' box. For example, you might search for all text in 14-point bold Helvetica.
# To replace text, enter the replacement text in the ''Replace with'' box. To search for specific text with specific formatting (for example, the word '''hello''' in bold), specify the formatting, put the text in the ''Search for'' box and leave the ''Replace with'' box blank.>br />To remove specific character formatting, click '''Format''', select the '''Font''' tab, then select the opposite format (for example, No Bold). The '''No Format''' button on the Find & Replace dialog box clears all previously selected formats.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{Documentation/Tip| Unless you plan to search for other text using those same attributes, click '''No Format''' to remove the attributes after completing your search. If you forget to do this, you may wonder why your next search fails to find words you know are in the document.}}

== Find and replace paragraph styles ==
If you combine material from several sources, you may discover that lots of unwanted paragraph styles have suddenly shown up in your document. To quickly change all the paragraphs of one (unwanted) style to another (preferred) style:

# On the expanded Find & Replace dialog box, select '''Search for Styles'''. (If you have attributes specified, this option is labeled ''Including Styles''.) The'' Search for'' and ''Replace with'' boxes now contain a list of styles.
# Select the styles you want to search for and replace.
# Click '''Find, Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Writer Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T07:39:26Z

Claire: /* Order of calculation */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== 運算類型 ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== 算術運算 ===
加法，減法，乘法和除法運算符的數值結果。數字的負號，例如-37。這個例子說明了如何輸入數字正在乘以本身一定數量的日子，例如2的三次方 = 2 * 2 * 2。

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| 加法
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 減法
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 負號
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
|乘法
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| 除法
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| 百分比
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| 次方
| 2^3

|}

=== 比較運算 ===
在比較公式中，使用IF函數，並得到一個真或假的答案，例如，=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)，簡單來說，就是如果內容單元格B6超過G12，就得到127，否則得到0。

輸入一個公式，回答TRUE或FALSE，如=B6>B12.。如果答案正確，答案則返回true，否則返回FALSE。

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| 等於
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| 大於
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| 小於
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| 大於或等於
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| 小於或等於
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| 不等式
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== 文字運算 ===
這是常見於電子表格中的文字運算。為了提供變化，以及如何在這種類型的資料顯示，文字可連接在來自不同地方的電子表格。下面就是一個例子。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''儲存格範圍名稱定義'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''命名儲存格列入的公式.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''定義工作表名稱.''

=== 參考運算 ===
最簡單的就是引用一個儲存格。但是，參考也可以參考矩形或長方體範圍或參考是一個列表的引用。要建立這樣的引用，你需要引用運算符。

儲存格的命名，以從儲存格的欄(字元)和列（編號）命名。在電子表格讀取從左到右，左上角單元格A1。下圖顯示了這些儲存格A1。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====範圍運算====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

範圍符號為一個參考到最小的範圍，包括儲存格引用的左參考和引用的儲存格的權利。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|參考一矩形範圍6單元，2 × 3列寬行高。
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|參考範圍的矩形由左上角儲存格A2至c9右下角。因此，範圍包含24個儲存格，3× 8。
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|參考範圍長方體共24個儲存格，4× 2 × 3
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====參考連結運算====

連接運算符被寫為波形。表達式為使用連接運算符的語法

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====交集運算====

交集運算符寫成感嘆號。

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|這個結果的範圍是B3:B4，因為儲存格A2:B4和B3:D4的內部
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|首先可以見成 A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3來計算. 結果是在 B2:B4, 空的, B2:C2, 和C1:C2. 然而這些結果是有交集的,並在空的部分. 所以最後的結果必須參考 B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== 計算的順序 ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T07:36:57Z

Claire: /* Intersection Operator */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== 運算類型 ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== 算術運算 ===
加法，減法，乘法和除法運算符的數值結果。數字的負號，例如-37。這個例子說明了如何輸入數字正在乘以本身一定數量的日子，例如2的三次方 = 2 * 2 * 2。

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| 加法
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 減法
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 負號
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
|乘法
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| 除法
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| 百分比
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| 次方
| 2^3

|}

=== 比較運算 ===
在比較公式中，使用IF函數，並得到一個真或假的答案，例如，=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)，簡單來說，就是如果內容單元格B6超過G12，就得到127，否則得到0。

輸入一個公式，回答TRUE或FALSE，如=B6>B12.。如果答案正確，答案則返回true，否則返回FALSE。

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| 等於
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| 大於
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| 小於
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| 大於或等於
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| 小於或等於
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| 不等式
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== 文字運算 ===
這是常見於電子表格中的文字運算。為了提供變化，以及如何在這種類型的資料顯示，文字可連接在來自不同地方的電子表格。下面就是一個例子。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''儲存格範圍名稱定義'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''命名儲存格列入的公式.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''定義工作表名稱.''

=== 參考運算 ===
最簡單的就是引用一個儲存格。但是，參考也可以參考矩形或長方體範圍或參考是一個列表的引用。要建立這樣的引用，你需要引用運算符。

儲存格的命名，以從儲存格的欄(字元)和列（編號）命名。在電子表格讀取從左到右，左上角單元格A1。下圖顯示了這些儲存格A1。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====範圍運算====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

範圍符號為一個參考到最小的範圍，包括儲存格引用的左參考和引用的儲存格的權利。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|參考一矩形範圍6單元，2 × 3列寬行高。
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|參考範圍的矩形由左上角儲存格A2至c9右下角。因此，範圍包含24個儲存格，3× 8。
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|參考範圍長方體共24個儲存格，4× 2 × 3
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====參考連結運算====

連接運算符被寫為波形。表達式為使用連接運算符的語法

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====交集運算====

交集運算符寫成感嘆號。

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|這個結果的範圍是B3:B4，因為儲存格A2:B4和B3:D4的內部
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|首先可以見成 A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3來計算. 結果是在 B2:B4, 空的, B2:C2, 和C1:C2. 然而這些結果是有交集的,並在空的部分. 所以最後的結果必須參考 B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== Order of calculation ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T07:28:45Z

Claire: /* Reference Concatenation Operator */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== 運算類型 ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== 算術運算 ===
加法，減法，乘法和除法運算符的數值結果。數字的負號，例如-37。這個例子說明了如何輸入數字正在乘以本身一定數量的日子，例如2的三次方 = 2 * 2 * 2。

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| 加法
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 減法
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 負號
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
|乘法
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| 除法
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| 百分比
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| 次方
| 2^3

|}

=== 比較運算 ===
在比較公式中，使用IF函數，並得到一個真或假的答案，例如，=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)，簡單來說，就是如果內容單元格B6超過G12，就得到127，否則得到0。

輸入一個公式，回答TRUE或FALSE，如=B6>B12.。如果答案正確，答案則返回true，否則返回FALSE。

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| 等於
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| 大於
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| 小於
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| 大於或等於
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| 小於或等於
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| 不等式
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== 文字運算 ===
這是常見於電子表格中的文字運算。為了提供變化，以及如何在這種類型的資料顯示，文字可連接在來自不同地方的電子表格。下面就是一個例子。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''儲存格範圍名稱定義'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''命名儲存格列入的公式.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''定義工作表名稱.''

=== 參考運算 ===
最簡單的就是引用一個儲存格。但是，參考也可以參考矩形或長方體範圍或參考是一個列表的引用。要建立這樣的引用，你需要引用運算符。

儲存格的命名，以從儲存格的欄(字元)和列（編號）命名。在電子表格讀取從左到右，左上角單元格A1。下圖顯示了這些儲存格A1。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====範圍運算====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

範圍符號為一個參考到最小的範圍，包括儲存格引用的左參考和引用的儲存格的權利。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|參考一矩形範圍6單元，2 × 3列寬行高。
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|參考範圍的矩形由左上角儲存格A2至c9右下角。因此，範圍包含24個儲存格，3× 8。
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|參考範圍長方體共24個儲存格，4× 2 × 3
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====參考連結運算====

連接運算符被寫為波形。表達式為使用連接運算符的語法

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====Intersection Operator====

The intersection operator is written as exclamation mark. An expression using the intersection operator has the syntax

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|This results a reference to the range B3:B4, because these cells are inside A2:B4 and inside B3:D4.
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|First the intersections A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3 are calculated. This results in B2:B4, empty, B2:C2, and C1:C2. Then these results are concatenated, dropping empty parts. So the final result is the reference list B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== Order of calculation ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T07:26:59Z

Claire: /* 範圍運算 */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== 運算類型 ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== 算術運算 ===
加法，減法，乘法和除法運算符的數值結果。數字的負號，例如-37。這個例子說明了如何輸入數字正在乘以本身一定數量的日子，例如2的三次方 = 2 * 2 * 2。

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| 加法
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 減法
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 負號
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
|乘法
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| 除法
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| 百分比
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| 次方
| 2^3

|}

=== 比較運算 ===
在比較公式中，使用IF函數，並得到一個真或假的答案，例如，=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)，簡單來說，就是如果內容單元格B6超過G12，就得到127，否則得到0。

輸入一個公式，回答TRUE或FALSE，如=B6>B12.。如果答案正確，答案則返回true，否則返回FALSE。

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| 等於
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| 大於
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| 小於
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| 大於或等於
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| 小於或等於
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| 不等式
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== 文字運算 ===
這是常見於電子表格中的文字運算。為了提供變化，以及如何在這種類型的資料顯示，文字可連接在來自不同地方的電子表格。下面就是一個例子。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''儲存格範圍名稱定義'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''命名儲存格列入的公式.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''定義工作表名稱.''

=== 參考運算 ===
最簡單的就是引用一個儲存格。但是，參考也可以參考矩形或長方體範圍或參考是一個列表的引用。要建立這樣的引用，你需要引用運算符。

儲存格的命名，以從儲存格的欄(字元)和列（編號）命名。在電子表格讀取從左到右，左上角單元格A1。下圖顯示了這些儲存格A1。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====範圍運算====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

範圍符號為一個參考到最小的範圍，包括儲存格引用的左參考和引用的儲存格的權利。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|參考一矩形範圍6單元，2 × 3列寬行高。
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|參考範圍的矩形由左上角儲存格A2至c9右下角。因此，範圍包含24個儲存格，3× 8。
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|參考範圍長方體共24個儲存格，4× 2 × 3
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====Reference Concatenation Operator====

The concatenation operator is written as tilde. An expression using the concatenation operator has the syntax

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====Intersection Operator====

The intersection operator is written as exclamation mark. An expression using the intersection operator has the syntax

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|This results a reference to the range B3:B4, because these cells are inside A2:B4 and inside B3:D4.
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|First the intersections A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3 are calculated. This results in B2:B4, empty, B2:C2, and C1:C2. Then these results are concatenated, dropping empty parts. So the final result is the reference list B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== Order of calculation ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T07:19:35Z

Claire: /* Reference operators */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== 運算類型 ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== 算術運算 ===
加法，減法，乘法和除法運算符的數值結果。數字的負號，例如-37。這個例子說明了如何輸入數字正在乘以本身一定數量的日子，例如2的三次方 = 2 * 2 * 2。

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| 加法
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 減法
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 負號
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
|乘法
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| 除法
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| 百分比
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| 次方
| 2^3

|}

=== 比較運算 ===
在比較公式中，使用IF函數，並得到一個真或假的答案，例如，=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)，簡單來說，就是如果內容單元格B6超過G12，就得到127，否則得到0。

輸入一個公式，回答TRUE或FALSE，如=B6>B12.。如果答案正確，答案則返回true，否則返回FALSE。

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| 等於
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| 大於
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| 小於
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| 大於或等於
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| 小於或等於
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| 不等式
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== 文字運算 ===
這是常見於電子表格中的文字運算。為了提供變化，以及如何在這種類型的資料顯示，文字可連接在來自不同地方的電子表格。下面就是一個例子。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''儲存格範圍名稱定義'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''命名儲存格列入的公式.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''定義工作表名稱.''

=== 參考運算 ===
最簡單的就是引用一個儲存格。但是，參考也可以參考矩形或長方體範圍或參考是一個列表的引用。要建立這樣的引用，你需要引用運算符。

儲存格的命名，以從儲存格的欄(字元)和列（編號）命名。在電子表格讀取從左到右，左上角單元格A1。下圖顯示了這些儲存格A1。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====範圍運算====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

範圍符號為一個參考到最小的範圍，包括儲存格引用的左參考和引用的儲存格的權利。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|Reference to a rectangle range with 6 cells, 2 column width × 3 row height. When you click on the reference in the formula in the input line, a border indicates the rectangle.
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|Reference to a rectangle range with cell A2 top left and cell C9 bottom right. So the range contains 24 cells, 3 column width × 8 row height.
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|Reference to a cuboid range with 24 cells, 4 column width × 2 row height × 3 sheets depth.
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====Reference Concatenation Operator====

The concatenation operator is written as tilde. An expression using the concatenation operator has the syntax

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====Intersection Operator====

The intersection operator is written as exclamation mark. An expression using the intersection operator has the syntax

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|This results a reference to the range B3:B4, because these cells are inside A2:B4 and inside B3:D4.
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|First the intersections A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3 are calculated. This results in B2:B4, empty, B2:C2, and C1:C2. Then these results are concatenated, dropping empty parts. So the final result is the reference list B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== Order of calculation ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T07:10:24Z

Claire: /* 文字運算 */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== 運算類型 ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== 算術運算 ===
加法，減法，乘法和除法運算符的數值結果。數字的負號，例如-37。這個例子說明了如何輸入數字正在乘以本身一定數量的日子，例如2的三次方 = 2 * 2 * 2。

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| 加法
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 減法
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 負號
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
|乘法
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| 除法
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| 百分比
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| 次方
| 2^3

|}

=== 比較運算 ===
在比較公式中，使用IF函數，並得到一個真或假的答案，例如，=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)，簡單來說，就是如果內容單元格B6超過G12，就得到127，否則得到0。

輸入一個公式，回答TRUE或FALSE，如=B6>B12.。如果答案正確，答案則返回true，否則返回FALSE。

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| 等於
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| 大於
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| 小於
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| 大於或等於
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| 小於或等於
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| 不等式
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== 文字運算 ===
這是常見於電子表格中的文字運算。為了提供變化，以及如何在這種類型的資料顯示，文字可連接在來自不同地方的電子表格。下面就是一個例子。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''儲存格範圍名稱定義'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''命名儲存格列入的公式.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''定義工作表名稱.''

=== Reference operators ===
In its simplest form a reference refers to a single cell. But references can also refer to a rectangle or cuboid range or a reference is a list of references. To build such references you need reference operators.

An individual cell is identified by the column identifier (characters) located along the upper edge of the spreadsheet and a row identifier (number) found along the side of the spreadsheet. On spreadsheets read from left to right, the upper left cell is A1. The figure below shows these identifiers for Cell A1.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====Range operator====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

The range operator builds a reference to the smallest range including both the cells referenced with the left reference and the cells referenced with the right reference.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|Reference to a rectangle range with 6 cells, 2 column width × 3 row height. When you click on the reference in the formula in the input line, a border indicates the rectangle.
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|Reference to a rectangle range with cell A2 top left and cell C9 bottom right. So the range contains 24 cells, 3 column width × 8 row height.
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|Reference to a cuboid range with 24 cells, 4 column width × 2 row height × 3 sheets depth.
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====Reference Concatenation Operator====

The concatenation operator is written as tilde. An expression using the concatenation operator has the syntax

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====Intersection Operator====

The intersection operator is written as exclamation mark. An expression using the intersection operator has the syntax

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|This results a reference to the range B3:B4, because these cells are inside A2:B4 and inside B3:D4.
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|First the intersections A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3 are calculated. This results in B2:B4, empty, B2:C2, and C1:C2. Then these results are concatenated, dropping empty parts. So the final result is the reference list B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== Order of calculation ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T06:54:00Z

Claire: /* Operator types */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== 運算類型 ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== 算術運算 ===
加法，減法，乘法和除法運算符的數值結果。數字的負號，例如-37。這個例子說明了如何輸入數字正在乘以本身一定數量的日子，例如2的三次方 = 2 * 2 * 2。

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| 加法
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 減法
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| 負號
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
|乘法
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| 除法
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| 百分比
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| 次方
| 2^3

|}

=== 比較運算 ===
在比較公式中，使用IF函數，並得到一個真或假的答案，例如，=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)，簡單來說，就是如果內容單元格B6超過G12，就得到127，否則得到0。

輸入一個公式，回答TRUE或FALSE，如=B6>B12.。如果答案正確，答案則返回true，否則返回FALSE。

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| 等於
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| 大於
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| 小於
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| 大於或等於
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| 小於或等於
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| 不等式
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== 文字運算 ===
這是常見於電子表格中的文字運算。為了提供變化，以及如何在這種類型的資料顯示，文字可連接在來自不同地方的電子表格。下面就是一個例子。

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Defining a name for a range of cells.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''Naming a cell or range of cells for inclusion in a formula.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''Defining Names on a worksheet.''

=== Reference operators ===
In its simplest form a reference refers to a single cell. But references can also refer to a rectangle or cuboid range or a reference is a list of references. To build such references you need reference operators.

An individual cell is identified by the column identifier (characters) located along the upper edge of the spreadsheet and a row identifier (number) found along the side of the spreadsheet. On spreadsheets read from left to right, the upper left cell is A1. The figure below shows these identifiers for Cell A1.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====Range operator====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

The range operator builds a reference to the smallest range including both the cells referenced with the left reference and the cells referenced with the right reference.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|Reference to a rectangle range with 6 cells, 2 column width × 3 row height. When you click on the reference in the formula in the input line, a border indicates the rectangle.
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|Reference to a rectangle range with cell A2 top left and cell C9 bottom right. So the range contains 24 cells, 3 column width × 8 row height.
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|Reference to a cuboid range with 24 cells, 4 column width × 2 row height × 3 sheets depth.
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====Reference Concatenation Operator====

The concatenation operator is written as tilde. An expression using the concatenation operator has the syntax

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====Intersection Operator====

The intersection operator is written as exclamation mark. An expression using the intersection operator has the syntax

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|This results a reference to the range B3:B4, because these cells are inside A2:B4 and inside B3:D4.
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|First the intersections A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3 are calculated. This results in B2:B4, empty, B2:C2, and C1:C2. Then these results are concatenated, dropping empty parts. So the final result is the reference list B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== Order of calculation ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating formulas

2009-09-30T06:36:40Z

Claire: /* Operators in formulas */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating formulas}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch3TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Using functions
}}
==Introduction==
By convention, only three kinds of data can be entered in a cell. Text, Numbers, and Formulas. You can enter formulas in two ways, either in the cell itself, or at the input line. Either way you will need to start it with one of the following symbols: "=", "+" or "-". Starting with anything else will cause the formula to be treated as if it were text.

== 公式運算子 ==
每個單元格在工作表可以作為一個資料持有人或一個地方的資料計算。在鍵入單元格中輸入數據，並移動到下一個單元格或按下鍵。以公式等號表明，該單元格將用於計算。像這樣的數學計算15 + 46，可實現如下所示。

{{Documentation/Note| To enter the <nowiki>=</nowiki> symbol for a purpose other than creating a formula as described in this chapter, type an apostrophe or single quotation mark before the data; for example, <nowiki>'=</nowiki> means different things to different people. Calc treats everything after the single quotation symbol as text.}}

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Simple Calculation in 1 Cell'''''
| '''''Calculation by Reference'''''

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5a.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5b.png]]

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5c.png]]
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5e.png]]

|-
|
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F5d.png]]

|}
''A simple calculation.''

While the calculation on the left was accomplished in only one cell, the real power is shown on the right where the data is placed in cells and the calculation is performed using references back to the cells. In this case, cells B3 and B4 were the data holders with B5 the cell where the calculation was performed. Note that the formula was shown as =B3 + B4. The plus sign indicates that the contents of cells B3 and B4 are to be added together and then have the result in the cell holding the formula. All formulas build upon this concept. Other ways of entering formulas are shown in Table 1.

These cell references allow formulas to use data from anywhere in the worksheet being worked on or from any other worksheet in the workbook that is opened. If the data needed was on different worksheets they would be referenced by referring to the worksheet, for example <nowiki>=SUM(</nowiki>Sheet2.B12+Sheet3.A11).

''Table 1: Common ways to enter formulas.''

{| class="prettytable"
! Formula
! Description

|-
| <nowiki>=A1+10</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1加10。

|-
| <nowiki>=A1*16%</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1x16%.

|-
| <nowiki>=A1 * A2</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1xA2

|-
| <nowiki>=ROUND(A1;1)</nowiki>
| 單元內容顯示A1四捨五入到小數點下一位

|-
| <nowiki>=EFFECTIVE(5%;12)</nowiki>
| 計算實際利率為每年5％的名義利率與並依12年支付

|-
| <nowiki>=B8-SUM(B10:B14)</nowiki>
| 計算B8減去B10到B14的總合
|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14))</nowiki>
| 先計算B10到B14的總合，再計算B8到SUM(B10:B14)的總合.

|-
| <nowiki>=SUM(B1:B65536)</nowiki>
| 所有數字總合在B顯示

|-
| <nowiki>=AVERAGE(BloodSugar)</nowiki>
| 計算BloodSugar的平均數
|-
| <nowiki>=IF(C31>140; "HIGH"; "OK")</nowiki>
| 結果顯示有條件分析資料來源有兩個。如果C31=144，那麼HIGH會顯示，否則OK顯示。

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Users of Lotus 1-2-3®, Quattro Pro® and other spreadsheet software may be familiar with formulas that begin with <nowiki>+, -, =, (, @, ., $,</nowiki> or <nowiki>#</nowiki>. A mathematical formula would look like +D2+C2 or +2*3. Functions begin with the <nowiki>@</nowiki> symbol such as <nowiki>@SUM(D2..D7)</nowiki>, <nowiki>@COS(@DEGTORAD(30))</nowiki> and <nowiki>@IRR(GUESS;CASHFLOWS)</nowiki>. Ranges are identified such as <nowiki>A1..D3</nowiki>.}}

Functions can be identified in Table 1 with a word, for example ROUND, followed by parentheses enclosing references or numbers.

It is also possible to establish ranges for inclusion by naming them using '''Insert > Names''', for example BloodSugar representing a range such as B3:B10. Logical functions can also be performed as represented by the IF statement which results in a conditional response based upon the data in the identified cell.

== Operator types ==
You can use the following operators in OpenOffice.org Calc: arithmetic, comparative, text, and reference.

=== Arithmetic operators ===
The addition, subtraction, multiplication and division operators return numerical results. The Negation and Percent operators identify a characteristic of the number found in the cell, for example -37. The example for Exponentiation illustrates how to enter a number that is being multiplied by itself a certain number of times, for example 23 <nowiki>= 2*2*2.</nowiki>

''Table 2: Arithmetical operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| + (Plus)
| Addition
| <nowiki>=1+1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| Subtraction
| <nowiki>=2-1</nowiki>

|-
| - (Minus)
| Negation
| -5

|-
| <nowiki>* (asterisk)</nowiki>
| Multiplication
| <nowiki>=2*2</nowiki>

|-
| / (Slash)
| Division
| <nowiki>=10/5</nowiki>

|-
| % (Percent)
| Percent
| 15%

|-
| ^ (Caret)
| Exponentiation
| 2^3

|}

=== Comparative operators ===
Comparative operators are found in formulas that use the IF function and return either a true or false answer; for example, <nowiki>=IF(B6>G12; 127; 0)</nowiki> which, loosely translated, means if the contents of cell B6 are greater than the contents of cell G12, then return the number 127, otherwise return the number 0.

A direct answer of TRUE or FALSE can be obtained by entering a formula such as =B6>B12. If the numbers found in the referenced cells are accurately represented, the answer TRUE is returned, otherwise FALSE is returned.

''Table 3: Comparative operators''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Operator'''''
| '''''Name'''''
| '''''Example'''''

|-
| <nowiki>= (equal sign)</nowiki>
| Equal
| A1=B1

|-
| > (Greater than)
| Greater than
| A1>B1

|-
| <nowiki>< (Less than)</nowiki>
| Less than
| <nowiki>A1<B1</nowiki>

|-
| >= (Greater than or equal to)
| Greater than or equal to
| A1>=B1

|-
| <nowiki><= (Less than or equal to)</nowiki>
| Less than or equal to
| <nowiki>A1<=B1</nowiki>

|-
| <nowiki><> (Inequality)</nowiki>
| Inequality
| <nowiki>A1<>B1</nowiki>

|}

=== Text operators ===
It is common for users to place text in spreadsheets. To provide for variability in what and how this type of data is displayed, text can be joined together in pieces coming from different places on the spreadsheet. Below is an example.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F7b.png]]

''Text Concatenation.''

In this example, specific pieces of the text were found in three different cells. To join these segments together, the formula also adds required spaces and punctuation housed within quotation marks resulting in a formula of <nowiki>=B6 & " " & C6 & ", " D6</nowiki>. The result is the concatenation into a correctly formatted date for this locale.

Taking this example further, the result cell is defined as a name, then text concatenation is performed using this defined name.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F8.png|thumb|none|500px|''Defining a name for a range of cells.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F9.png|thumb|none|500px|''Naming a cell or range of cells for inclusion in a formula.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10a.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10b.png]]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F10c.png]]

''Defining Names on a worksheet.''

=== Reference operators ===
In its simplest form a reference refers to a single cell. But references can also refer to a rectangle or cuboid range or a reference is a list of references. To build such references you need reference operators.

An individual cell is identified by the column identifier (characters) located along the upper edge of the spreadsheet and a row identifier (number) found along the side of the spreadsheet. On spreadsheets read from left to right, the upper left cell is A1. The figure below shows these identifiers for Cell A1.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F11.png|thumb|none|500px|''A single cell reference'']]

====Range operator====

The range operator is written as colon. An expression using the range operator has the syntax

reference left ''':''' reference right

The range operator builds a reference to the smallest range including both the cells referenced with the left reference and the cells referenced with the right reference.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Reference to a rectangle range.'']]

''The picture should be exchanged with one using the new transparent highlighting for selections. ''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

In the upper left corner of the figure above, the reference A1:D12 is shown, corresponding to the cells included in the drag operation with the mouse to highlight the range.

''The following is about selecting and naming cells and should be moved somewhere else or be dropped.''[[User:Regina|Regina]] 18:33, 19 September 2009 (UTC)

[start to move or drop]
This same range could also be created <--wrong term! by entering in the Name Box directly as shown below. After pressing ''Enter'', the same range is selected.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F13.png|thumb|none|500px|''Direct entry of Reference Operator into Name Box.'']]

A reference operator <--wrong term! can also be created by defining a named area by selecting the menu item '''Insert > Names > Define''', pressing ''Ctrl+F3'', or clicking the icon, if it shows on your toolbar.

[end to move or drop]

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:14em"|A2:B4
|Reference to a rectangle range with 6 cells, 2 column width × 3 row height. When you click on the reference in the formula in the input line, a border indicates the rectangle.
|-
|(A2:B4):C9
|Reference to a rectangle range with cell A2 top left and cell C9 bottom right. So the range contains 24 cells, 3 column width × 8 row height.
|-
|Sheet1.A3:Sheet3.D4
|Reference to a cuboid range with 24 cells, 4 column width × 2 row height × 3 sheets depth.
|}

When you enter B4:A2 or A4:B2 directly, then OOo will turn it to A2:B4. So the left top cell of the range is left of the colon and the bottom right cell is right of the colon. But if you name the cell B4 for example with '_start' and A2 with '_end', you can use _start:_end without any error.

OOo can not reference a whole column of unspecified length via A:A or a whole row via 1:1 yet as you might know from other spreadsheet programs, see {{bug|20495}}.

====Reference Concatenation Operator====

The concatenation operator is written as tilde. An expression using the concatenation operator has the syntax

reference left '''~''' reference right

The result of such an expression is a reference list, which is an ordered list of references. Some functions can take a reference list as argument, SUM, MAX or INDEX for example.

The reference concatenation is sometimes called 'union'. But it is no set union. COUNT(A1:C3~B2:D2) returns 12 (=9+3), whereas looking at it as set of cells, it has only 10 cells.

Notice that SUM(A1:C3;B2:D2) is different from SUM( A1:C3~B2:D2) although they give the same result. The first is a function call with 2 parameters, each of them is reference to a range. The second is a function call with 1 parameter, which is a reference list.

====Intersection Operator====

The intersection operator is written as exclamation mark. An expression using the intersection operator has the syntax

reference left ! reference right

If the references refer to single ranges, the result is a reference to a single range, containing all cells, which are both in the left reference and in the right reference.

If the references are reference lists, than each list item from the left is intersected with each one from the right and these results are concatenated to a reference list. The order is, to first intersect the first item from the left with all items from the right, then intersect the second item from the left with all items from the right, and so on.

Examples

{|
|-
|style="width:20em"|A2:B4 ! B3:D6
|This results a reference to the range B3:B4, because these cells are inside A2:B4 and inside B3:D4.
|-
|(A2:B4~B1:C2) ! (B2:C6~C1:D3)
|First the intersections A2:B4!B2:C6, A2:B4!C1:D3, B1:C2!B2:C6 and B1:C2!C1:D3 are calculated. This results in B2:B4, empty, B2:C2, and C1:C2. Then these results are concatenated, dropping empty parts. So the final result is the reference list B2:B4 ~ B2:C2 ~ C1:C2.
|}

You can use the intersection operator to refer a cell in a cross tabulation in an good understandable way. If you have columns labeled 'Temperature' and 'Precipitation' and the rows labeled 'January', 'February', 'March',… then the expression

'February' ! !Temperature'

will reference to the cell containing the temperature in February.

The intersection operator ! should have a higher precedence than the concatenation operator ~, but in OOo3.1 it is wrong implemented. Therefore you should not rely on precedence, but always put the part which to be first calculated in parentheses.

== Order of calculation ==
''Order of calculation'' refers to the sequence that numerical operations are performed. Division and multiplication are performed before addition or subtraction. There is a common tendency to expect calculations to be made from left to right as the equation would be read in English. Calc evaluates the entire formula, then based upon programming precedence breaks the formula down executing multiplication and division operations before other operations. Due to this fact when creating formulas you should test your formula to make sure that the correct result is being obtained. An example of order of calculation in operation follows.

''Table 4 – Order of Calculation''

{| class="prettytable"
| '''''Left To Right Calculation'''''
| '''''Ordered Calculation'''''

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 11
| <nowiki>=1+3*2+3 result 10</nowiki>

|-
| 1+3=4, then 4 X 2 = 8, then 8 + 3 = 11
| 3*2=6, then 1 + 6 + 3 = 10

|-
| Another possible intention could be:
| The program resolves the multiplication of 3 X 2 before dealing with the numbers being added.

|-
| 1+3*2+3 = 20
|

|}

If you intend for the result to be either of the two possible solutions on the left, the way to achieve these results would be to order the formula as:

{| class="prettytable"
| ((1+3) * 2)+3 = 11
| (1+3) * (2+3) = 20

|}

{{Documentation/Note| Consider using parentheses grouping operations to avoid obtaining incorrect calculations, e.g. <nowiki>= B4+G12*C4/M12</nowiki> becoming <nowiki>=((B4+G12)*C4)/M12</nowiki>.}}

== Calculations linking sheets ==
Another powerful feature of Calc is the ability to link data through several worksheets. The naming of worksheets can be helpful to identify where specific data may be found. A name such a Payroll or Boise Sales is much more meaningful than Sheet1. The function named SHEET() returns the sheet number in the collection of spreadsheets. With this function, if you are currently on the third sheet counting from the left along the worksheet tabs, the number 3 is returned. If you drag the worksheets around to different locations among the tabs, the number will return the number referring to the current position of this worksheet.

{{Documentation/Caution| Users may experience a problem when creating a formula that references other worksheets. If you use the function <nowiki>SHEET()</nowiki> the number of the current worksheet appears even if you enter the name of the worksheet desired, e.g., <nowiki>=SHEET(Branch4)</nowiki> and you have as the top worksheet named CombinedOperations. This function only refers to the current or top worksheet and not to other worksheets found in the collection or file.}}

An example of calculations obtaining data from other work can be seen in a business setting where a business combines its branch operations into a single worksheet.

{| class="prettytable"
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14a.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 1.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14b.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 2.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14c.png]]
| Sheet containing data for Branch 3.

|-
| [[Image:CG3Ch3F14d.png]]
| Sheet containing combined data for all branches.

|}
''Combining data from several sheets into a single sheet.''

To accomplish the links, it can be easier if the Function Wizard is used.

# Open the Function Wizard by clicking the f(x) button on the toolbar, or by selecting '''Insert > Function''', or by pressing ''Ctrl+F2''.
# Select a category of functions to shorten the list, then scroll down through the named functions and select the required one. When you select a function, its description appears on the right-hand side of the dialog. Double-click on the required function.
# The wizard now displays an area to the right where you can enter data manually in text boxes or click the '''Shrink''' button [[Image:]] to shrink the wizard so you can select the cells from the worksheet.
# To select cells, either click directly upon the needed cell or hold down the left mouse button and drag to select the needed area.
# When the area has been selected, click the '''Shrink''' button again to return to the wizard.
# If multiple ranges are needed, then select the next text box below the first and perform the same task for the next range. The wizard will accept in the Sum function up to 30 such ranges.

The following figures show how to create the combined sheet shown in the example above.

[[Image:CG3Ch3F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Selecting the SUM function in the Function Wizard.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Further steps in selecting cells containing data.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch3F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Completed entries in Function Wizard.'']]

== Strategies for creating formulas ==
There are several broad approaches when making a decision to create a formula. In deciding on an approach, consider how many other people will need to use the worksheets, the life of the worksheets, and the variations that could be encountered from use.

=== Enter a unique formula in each cell ===
The first and most basic strategy is to view whatever formulas are needed as simple and with a limited use life. The strategy is then to place a unique formula in each appropriate cell.

=== Break formulas into parts and combine the parts ===
The second strategy is similar, but instead you break down longer formulas into smaller parts and then combine the parts into the whole.

Editor's note: This needs some explanation, but it is NOT about the "formula editor" (Math).

=== Use the Basic editor to create functions ===
A third strategy is to use the Basic editor and create your own functions. This approach would be used where the result would greatly simplify the use of the spreadsheet by the end user and keep the formulas simple with a better chance of avoiding errors. This approach also can make the maintenance easier by having corrections or updates kept in one central location. The use of macros is described in Chapter 12 of this book.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:50:25Z

Claire: /* Column and line charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== 平面圖 ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== 線圖 ==
線圖是一個時間序列的圖。當你想要強調的連續性，它是理想的原始數據和有用的圖表，並擁有豐富的數據顯示的趨勢或隨著時間推移的變化。
在折線圖，X軸代表是非常理想的時間序列數據

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== 散佈 or XY 圖 ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net 圖 ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

==股票圖 ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== 欄與行圖 ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:49:55Z

Claire: /* Stock charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== 平面圖 ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== 線圖 ==
線圖是一個時間序列的圖。當你想要強調的連續性，它是理想的原始數據和有用的圖表，並擁有豐富的數據顯示的趨勢或隨著時間推移的變化。
在折線圖，X軸代表是非常理想的時間序列數據

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== 散佈 or XY 圖 ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net 圖 ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

==股票圖 ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:49:20Z

Claire: /* Net charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== 平面圖 ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== 線圖 ==
線圖是一個時間序列的圖。當你想要強調的連續性，它是理想的原始數據和有用的圖表，並擁有豐富的數據顯示的趨勢或隨著時間推移的變化。
在折線圖，X軸代表是非常理想的時間序列數據

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== 散佈 or XY 圖 ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net 圖 ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:48:33Z

Claire: /* Scatter or XY charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== 平面圖 ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== 線圖 ==
線圖是一個時間序列的圖。當你想要強調的連續性，它是理想的原始數據和有用的圖表，並擁有豐富的數據顯示的趨勢或隨著時間推移的變化。
在折線圖，X軸代表是非常理想的時間序列數據

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== 散佈 or XY 圖 ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:47:20Z

Claire: /* 線圖 */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== 平面圖 ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== 線圖 ==
線圖是一個時間序列的圖。當你想要強調的連續性，它是理想的原始數據和有用的圖表，並擁有豐富的數據顯示的趨勢或隨著時間推移的變化。
在折線圖，X軸代表是非常理想的時間序列數據

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== Scatter or XY charts ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:38:34Z

Claire: /* Line charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== 平面圖 ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== 線圖 ==
A ''line chart'' is a time series with a progression. It is ideal for raw data, and useful for charts with plentiful data that shows trends or changes over time where you want to emphasize continuity. On line charts, the x-axis is ideal to represent time series data.

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== Scatter or XY charts ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:38:10Z

Claire: /* Area charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== 平面圖 ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== Line charts ==
A ''line chart'' is a time series with a progression. It is ideal for raw data, and useful for charts with plentiful data that shows trends or changes over time where you want to emphasize continuity. On line charts, the x-axis is ideal to represent time series data.

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== Scatter or XY charts ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:37:38Z

Claire: /* Donut charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== 環圈圖 ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== Area charts ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== Line charts ==
A ''line chart'' is a time series with a progression. It is ideal for raw data, and useful for charts with plentiful data that shows trends or changes over time where you want to emphasize continuity. On line charts, the x-axis is ideal to represent time series data.

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== Scatter or XY charts ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T05:36:17Z

Claire: /* Pie charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== 圓餅圖 ==
當您需要比較的程度時，圓餅圖是顯示較為出色的。

當圖表數列包括在您的餅圖，如果你想有一個圓餅圖，您可能需要調整這個最初數據範圍頁面，或是使用格式 “> 數據範圍”數據系列對話框。

還有幾個有趣的事情可以做圓餅圖。這是其中一個圖表，可以有效地製作成3D圖表。它可以傾斜或是有陰影，最後就變成了藝術作品。不過不要混亂得不得了，否則你的資訊會丟失。

您可以選擇在圖表匯出圓餅圖，但這是一個可有可無的選擇。如果你的目的是突出一件其中的餅圖，你可以分開後，在你完成了圖表，將他凸顯出來，並拖出來。當您這樣做時，您可能需要擴大圖表區並再次恢復原來的大小的塊。

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D圓餅圖表:選擇插入 “> 圖表，並取消顯示圖例框。選擇插入 “> 數據標籤並選擇顯示數值。然後，仔細選擇一塊你想突出餅圖。最好的方法是將角度移動到邊緣的一塊，然後按一下;將有9個綠色區域去強調它。然後將它從剩下的部分。你會發現實際的餅片圖，將減少大小，您需要強調圖表並在一個角度裡拖動它增加大小。

* 3D圓餅圖的架構和照明調整:格式 “> 3D視圖 ”> 照明，您可以改變光線的方向，光的顏色，以及陰影處。我們還同一組的標籤，調整了3D角度光盤的對話框中,

幸運的是更新圖表進行變更時，你就可以看到您有效果。

.如果你想分開之一件，點選時仔細，你應該會看到一個線框亮點。拖出來用滑鼠像你需要增加的2D圖表的規模圖表一樣。

* 3D圓餅圖和插入 “> 數據標籤，會顯示數據標籤的百分比。然後，仔細選擇每件個線框突出和滑鼠右點獲得該對象的屬性對話框，選擇區選項。我們選擇其中一個圖，其他的，我們使用的透明標籤，並調整透明度調到50％。

== Donut charts ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== Area charts ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== Line charts ==
A ''line chart'' is a time series with a progression. It is ideal for raw data, and useful for charts with plentiful data that shows trends or changes over time where you want to emphasize continuity. On line charts, the x-axis is ideal to represent time series data.

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== Scatter or XY charts ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T04:48:56Z

Claire: /* Bar charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== 長條圖 ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

長條圖表對於視覺衝擊的數據進行比較優秀，時間並不重要，例如，比較流行的一些產品在市場上。

* 圖1為很容易表現出使用圖表的比較，插入 “> 網格，取消勾選Y軸，並插入 ”> 均值線
* 圖二是一個簡單邊界和3D圖表的3D選項圖表
* 第三個圖公司名稱來代替軸的標籤。我們還改變了顏色的模式。

== Pie charts ==
''Pie charts'' are excellent when you need to compare proportions. For example, comparisons of departmental spending: what the department spent on different items or what different departments spent. They work best with smaller numbers of values, about half a dozen; more than this and the visual impact begins to fade.

As the Chart Wizard guesses the series that you wish to include in your pie chart, you might need to adjust this initially on the Wizard’s Data Ranges page if you know you want a pie chart, or by using the '''Format > Data Ranges > Data Series''' dialog.

There are a couple of interesting things you can do with pie charts. This is one of the charts which can profitably be made into a 3D chart. It can then be tilted, given shadows, and generally turned into a work of art. Just don’t clutter it so much that your message is lost.

You can choose in the Chart Wizard to explode the pie chart, but this is an all or nothing option. If your aim is to accentuate one piece of the pie, you can separate out one piece by carefully highlighting it after you have finished with the Chart Wizard, and dragging it out of the pie plate. When you do this you might need to enlarge the chart area again to regain the original size of the pieces.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D pie chart in Chart Wizard. Choose '''Insert > Legend''' and uncheck the ''Display legend'' box. Choose '''Insert > Data Labels''' and choose ''Show value as number''. Then carefully select the piece of pie you wish to highlight. The best way is to move the cursor to the edge of the piece and click; the piece will have nine green highlight squares to mark it. Then drag it out from the rest of the pieces. You will find the actual pieces will decrease in size and you will need to highlight the chart wall and drag it at a corner to increase the size.
* 3D pie chart with realistic schema and illumination adjusted by going to '''Format > 3D view > Illumination''' where you can change the direction of the light, the color of the ambient light, and the depth of the shade. We also adjusted the 3D angle of the disc in the ''Perspective ''dialog on the same set of tabs. Fortunately the chart updates as you make changes, so you can see the effects you are having. If you want to separate out one of the pieces, click on it carefully; you should see a wire frame highlight. Drag it out with the mouse and like the 2D chart you need to increase the size of the chart wall.
* 3D pie chart and '''Insert > Data labels''', show data labels as percentage. Then carefully select each of the pieces so that it has a wire frame highlight and right-click to get the object properties dialog and choose the ''Area'' tab. For one we chose a bitmap, for another a gradient and for the third we used the ''Transparency'' tab and adjusted the transparency to 50%.

== Donut charts ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== Area charts ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== Line charts ==
A ''line chart'' is a time series with a progression. It is ideal for raw data, and useful for charts with plentiful data that shows trends or changes over time where you want to emphasize continuity. On line charts, the x-axis is ideal to represent time series data.

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== Scatter or XY charts ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Gallery of chart types

2009-09-30T04:16:00Z

Claire: /* Column charts */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Gallery of chart types}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch4TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Resizing and moving the chart
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates
}}
It is important to remember that while your data can be presented with a number of different charts, the message you want to convey to your audience dictates the chart you ultimately use. The following sections present examples of the types of charts that Calc provides, with some of the tweaks that each sort can have and some notes as to what purpose you might have for that chart type. For details, see the Help.

== 柱形圖 ==
''Column charts'' are commonly used for data that shows trends over time. They are best for charts that have a relatively small number of data points. (For large time series a line chart would be better.) It is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful charts and the easiest to understand.

== Bar charts ==
[[Image:CG3Ch4F24.png|thumb|none|500px|''Three bar graph treatments.'']]

''Bar charts'' are excellent for giving an immediate visual impact for data comparison where time is not important, for example to compare the popularity of a few products in a marketplace.

* Graph one is achieved quite simply by using the chart wizard with '''Insert > Grid'''s, un-check y-axis, and '''Insert > Mean Value Lines'''.
* Graph two is the 3D option in the chart wizard with a simple border and the 3D chart area twisted around.
* The third graph is an attempt to get rid of the legend and put labels showing the names of the companies on the axis instead. We also changed the colors to a hatch pattern.

== Pie charts ==
''Pie charts'' are excellent when you need to compare proportions. For example, comparisons of departmental spending: what the department spent on different items or what different departments spent. They work best with smaller numbers of values, about half a dozen; more than this and the visual impact begins to fade.

As the Chart Wizard guesses the series that you wish to include in your pie chart, you might need to adjust this initially on the Wizard’s Data Ranges page if you know you want a pie chart, or by using the '''Format > Data Ranges > Data Series''' dialog.

There are a couple of interesting things you can do with pie charts. This is one of the charts which can profitably be made into a 3D chart. It can then be tilted, given shadows, and generally turned into a work of art. Just don’t clutter it so much that your message is lost.

You can choose in the Chart Wizard to explode the pie chart, but this is an all or nothing option. If your aim is to accentuate one piece of the pie, you can separate out one piece by carefully highlighting it after you have finished with the Chart Wizard, and dragging it out of the pie plate. When you do this you might need to enlarge the chart area again to regain the original size of the pieces.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F25.png|thumb|none|500px|''Pie charts'']]

* 2D pie chart in Chart Wizard. Choose '''Insert > Legend''' and uncheck the ''Display legend'' box. Choose '''Insert > Data Labels''' and choose ''Show value as number''. Then carefully select the piece of pie you wish to highlight. The best way is to move the cursor to the edge of the piece and click; the piece will have nine green highlight squares to mark it. Then drag it out from the rest of the pieces. You will find the actual pieces will decrease in size and you will need to highlight the chart wall and drag it at a corner to increase the size.
* 3D pie chart with realistic schema and illumination adjusted by going to '''Format > 3D view > Illumination''' where you can change the direction of the light, the color of the ambient light, and the depth of the shade. We also adjusted the 3D angle of the disc in the ''Perspective ''dialog on the same set of tabs. Fortunately the chart updates as you make changes, so you can see the effects you are having. If you want to separate out one of the pieces, click on it carefully; you should see a wire frame highlight. Drag it out with the mouse and like the 2D chart you need to increase the size of the chart wall.
* 3D pie chart and '''Insert > Data labels''', show data labels as percentage. Then carefully select each of the pieces so that it has a wire frame highlight and right-click to get the object properties dialog and choose the ''Area'' tab. For one we chose a bitmap, for another a gradient and for the third we used the ''Transparency'' tab and adjusted the transparency to 50%.

== Donut charts ==
If you want to show the proportional nature of your data but want to include more than one data series, a ''donut chart'' is your best option. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time. However, two or three data series are all you can include before it becomes meaningless. The extra layer attempts to give pies another dimension of time.

As with pie chart, you can explode the pieces of the donut chart. You can also separate individual pieces as in pie charts.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F26.png|thumb|none|500px|'' Donut charts'']]

As in pie charts, data labeling may be used a substitute for the legend, not an addition to it.

== Area charts ==
An ''area chart'' is a version of a line or column graph. It may be useful where you wish to emphasize volume of change. Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the data you use will make a difference.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F27.png|thumb|none|500px|''Area charts—the good, the bad, and the ugly'']]

As shown above, an area chart is sometimes tricky to use. This may be one good reason to use transparency values in an area chart.

* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids'''. As the data overlaps, some of it is missing behind the first data series. This is not what you want. A better solution is Chart 2.
* '''Chart wizard > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% Transparency; Labels > Tile 55°''' . The transparency makes it easy to see the data hidden behind the first data series.
* '''Chart wizard > 3D > realistic > no y-grids > Object Properties > Area > 50% transparency'''. We also twisted the chart area around and gave the chart wall a picture of the sky. As you can see, the legend turns into labels on the z-axis. But overall, though it is visually more appealing, it is more difficult to see the point you are trying to make with the data.

Other ways of visualizing the same data series are represented by the stacked area chart or the percentage stacked area chart. The first does what it says, each number of each series is added to the others so that it shows an overall volume not a comparison of the data. The percentage stacked chart shows each value in the series as a part of the whole. For example in June all three values are added together and that number represents 100%. The individual values are a percentage of that. Many charts have varieties which have this option.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F28.png|thumb|none|500px|''Stacked and percentage stacked area charts'']]

== Line charts ==
A ''line chart'' is a time series with a progression. It is ideal for raw data, and useful for charts with plentiful data that shows trends or changes over time where you want to emphasize continuity. On line charts, the x-axis is ideal to represent time series data.

Things to do with lines: thicken them up, make them 3D, smooth the contours, just use points.

3D lines confuse the viewer, so just using a thicker line often works better.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F29.png|thumb|none|500px|''Line charts'']]

== Scatter or XY charts ==
''Scatter charts'' are great for visualizing data that you have not had time to analyze, and they may be the best for data when you have a constant value with which to compare the data; for example, weather data, reactions under different acidity levels, conditions at altitude, or any data which matches two series of numeric data. In contrast to line charts, the x-axis are the left to right labels which usually indicate a time series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F30.png|thumb|none|500px|''A particularly volatile time in the world currency market.'']]

There is a catch with scatter charts that may surprise those unfamiliar with how they work. One data series represents the x-axis and the next represents the y-axis. The chart becomes a Cartesian map with each point showing the (x,y) point of each pair of data. Thus you may be hoping for a chart with two series of points, as you would get in a line chart, and only have one unexpectedly twisted line. Each additional series of data is matched against the original series. Figure 30 shows a comparison of three currencies with the Japanese Yen. Even though the table presents the monthly series, the chart does not. In fact the Japanese Yen does not appear; it is merely used as the constant series that all the other data series are compared to.

== Net charts ==
A ''net chart'' is similar to polar or radar graphs. They are useful for comparing data that are not time series, but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment or direction. The poles of the net chart are the y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are best, any more and this type of chart becomes confusing. Before and after can be plotted on the same chart, or perhaps expected and real results, so that differences can be compared.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F31.png|thumb|none|500px|''Two net diagrams showing totally fabricated data from totally fictional experiments.'']]

* Plain net chart without grids and with just points no lines.
* Net chart with lines and points and grid. axes colors changed as well as labels. chart area color = gradient quadrant and the points changed to fancy 3D ones.

There are also varieties of net chart that show the data series as stacked numbers or stacked percentages.

== Stock charts ==
A ''stock chart'' is a specialized column graph specifically for stocks and shares. You can choose traditional lines, candlestick, and two-column type charts. The data required for these charts is quite specialized, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. Of course the x-axis represents a time series.

When you set up a stock chart in the Chart Wizard, the Data Series dialog is very important. You need to tell it which series is for the opening price, closing price, high and low price of the stock, or else the chart may be indecipherable. The sample table for this chapter needed to be changed to fit the data series.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F32.png|thumb|none|500px|''Adjusting data series for stock charts.'']]

A nice touch is that OpenOffice.org Chart color-codes the rising and falling shares: white for rising and black for falling in the candlestick chart, and red and blue in the traditional line chart.

== Column and line charts ==
A ''column and line chart'' is a combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

You can choose the number of columns and lines in the Chart Wizard. So for example you might have two columns with two lines to represent two product lines with the sales figures and profit margins of both.

[[Image:CG3Ch4F33.png|thumb|none|500px|''Column and line chart'']]

The chart has data for two products, manufacturing costs and profits over a period of time, in this case, six months in 2007. We highlighted the table and started the Chart Wizard. We chose the Column and Line chart type with two lines and the data series in rows. Then we gave it a title to highlight the aspect we want to show. The lines are different colors at this stage and don’t reflect the product relationships. When we finished with the Chart Wizard, we highlighted the chart, clicked on the line, right-clicked, and chose '''Object properties > Line'''.

On this tab there are a few things to change, first the color to match the products, so both Ark Manufacturing and profit are blue and Prall is red. I think the lines need to be more noticeable so I made the lines thicker by increasing the width to .08.

The background is done by highlighting the chart wall and right-clicking, choosing '''Object Properties > Area''', and changing the drop-down box to show Gradient. We chose one of the preset gradient patterns and made it lighter by going to the ''Transparency'' tab and making the gradient 50% transparent.

We also decided that the chart looked cleaner without the grid so we went to '''Insert > Grids''' and unchecked the X-axis option.

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Working with sheets

2009-09-30T04:03:08Z

Claire: /* 插入新的工作表 */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with sheets}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch1TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Working with columns and rows
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Viewing Calc
}}
Like any other Calc element, sheets can be inserted, deleted, and renamed.

== 插入新的工作表 ==
有幾種方法來插入一個新表。第一步，所有的方法是選擇工作表，新表將插入舊表旁邊。那麼任何下列選項都可以使用。
* 點選插入選單，選擇工作表，或
* 右鍵單選並選擇插入工作表，或
* 點擊進入一個空的地方，最後該行的工作表標籤。

[[Image:CalcInsertSheet.png|thumb|none|600px|''Creating a new sheet'']]

每個方法將打開插入工作表對話框。你可以選擇新的工作表位置是在選定的工作表之前或之後，有多少表，是您要插入的。如果你只有一個工作表中插入，就可以命名工作表.

[[Image:InsertSheet3.png|thumb|none|500px|''Insert Sheet dialog'']]

== 刪除工作表 ==
工作表可刪除單個或多個.

=== 單表 ===
右鍵單選工作表選項/刪除，然後從彈出式選單選擇刪除工作表，或是單選編輯 “> 工作表>”刪除

=== 多個工作表 ===
要刪除多個工作表，選擇它們如前所述，然後可以用滑鼠右鍵單選在其中一個標籤，然後從彈出式選單選擇刪除表，或單選編輯 “> 工作表>”刪除。

== 重新命名工作表 ==
命名名稱為一個新的表是SheetX，其中 X是一個數字。當這個小試算表只有少數表，有許多工作表就會顯得笨拙。

為了使工作表更有意義的名稱，您可以

* 當您建立工作表時，在名稱框中輸入名稱，或
* 右鍵單選工作表標籤，然後從彈出式選單中選擇重新命名工作表，並取代現有的名稱或是一個更好的名稱。

{{Documentation/Note| 工作表命名必須以字母或數字，其他字符，包括空格是不允許的。除了第一個字符的工作表的名稱，允許的字符是字母，數字，空格和下劃線字符。試圖重命名工作表給與一個無效的名字將產生錯誤訊息。.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Working with sheets

2009-09-30T04:02:22Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with sheets}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch1TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Working with columns and rows
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Viewing Calc
}}
Like any other Calc element, sheets can be inserted, deleted, and renamed.

== 插入新的工作表 ==
有幾種方法來插入一個新表。第一步，所有的方法是選擇工作表，新表將插入舊表旁邊。那麼任何下列選項都可以使用。
* 點選插入選單，選擇工作表，或
* 右鍵單選並選擇插入工作表，或
* 點擊進入一個空的地方，最後該行的工作表標籤。

[[Image:CalcInsertSheet.png|thumb|none|600px|''Creating a new sheet'']]

Each method will open the Insert Sheet dialog box. 每個方法將打開插入工作表對話框。你可以選擇新的工作表位置是在選定的工作表之前或之後，有多少表，是您要插入的。如果你只有一個工作表中插入，就可以命名工作表.

[[Image:InsertSheet3.png|thumb|none|500px|''Insert Sheet dialog'']]

== 刪除工作表 ==
工作表可刪除單個或多個.

=== 單表 ===
右鍵單選工作表選項/刪除，然後從彈出式選單選擇刪除工作表，或是單選編輯 “> 工作表>”刪除

=== 多個工作表 ===
要刪除多個工作表，選擇它們如前所述，然後可以用滑鼠右鍵單選在其中一個標籤，然後從彈出式選單選擇刪除表，或單選編輯 “> 工作表>”刪除。

== 重新命名工作表 ==
命名名稱為一個新的表是SheetX，其中 X是一個數字。當這個小試算表只有少數表，有許多工作表就會顯得笨拙。

為了使工作表更有意義的名稱，您可以

* 當您建立工作表時，在名稱框中輸入名稱，或
* 右鍵單選工作表標籤，然後從彈出式選單中選擇重新命名工作表，並取代現有的名稱或是一個更好的名稱。

{{Documentation/Note| 工作表命名必須以字母或數字，其他字符，包括空格是不允許的。除了第一個字符的工作表的名稱，允許的字符是字母，數字，空格和下劃線字符。試圖重命名工作表給與一個無效的名字將產生錯誤訊息。.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Formatting data

2009-09-30T03:33:06Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Formatting data}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch2TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Editing data
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Autoformat and themes
}}
在Calc的數據格式，展現在幾個方面.它可以是編輯的一部分單元格樣式，以便它自動應用，也可以手動應用到單元。有些手動格式可用於使用工具欄圖標。為了更好控制和額外的選項，選擇相應的單元格或單元格，滑鼠右鍵點擊，然後選擇單元格格式，所有的格式選項在下面討論。

{{Documentation/Note| 本節所討論的所有設定為一部分的風格樣式和格式，見第十章有更多描述。}}

== Formatting multiple lines of text ==
Multiple lines of text can be entered into a single cell using automatic wrapping or manual line breaks. Each method is useful for different situations.

=== Using automatic wrapping ===
To set text to wrap at the end of the cell, right-click on the cell and select '''Format Cells''' (or choose '''Format > Cells''' from the menu bar, or press ''Ctrl+1''). On the ''Alignment'' tab, under Properties, select '''Wrap text automatically'''.

[[Image:CellAlign.png|thumb|none|500px|''Format Cells > Alignment dialog'']]

The results are shown below.

[[Image:CalcTextWrap.png|thumb|none|500px|''Automatic text wrap'']]

=== Using manual line breaks ===
To insert a manual line break while typing in a cell, press ''Ctrl+Enter''. This method does not work with the cursor in the input line. When editing text, first double-click the cell, then single-click at the position where you want the line break.

When a manual line break is entered, the cell width does not change. The figure below shows the results of using two manual line breaks after the first line of text.

[[Image:CalcManualBreak.png|thumb|none|500px|''Cell with manual line breaks'']]

== Shrinking text to fit the cell ==
The font size of the data in a cell can automatically adjust to fit in a cell. To do this, select the Shrink to fit cell option in the Format Cells dialog. The figure below shows the results.

[[Image:CalcShrinkText.png|thumb|none|500px|''Shrinking font size to fit cells'']]

== 格式化數字 ==
數字格式可應用於圖標格式工具欄上，選擇單元格，然後點擊相關的圖標。.

[[Image:CalcNumberFormats.png|Calc number formats]] ''數字格式圖標，從左到右依次為：貨幣，百分比，日期，指數，標準，小數點後添加，刪除小數位。''

欲了解更多的控制或選擇其他數字格式，請使用數字選項

* 在類別列表的資料適用於任何類型的資料.
* 控制小數點的位置與前置零.
* 輸入自訂格式的代碼.

語言與地方的設定因不同而有不同的格式，如訂單的日期和貨幣的標誌。.

[[Image:CalcFormatNumbers.png|thumb|none|500px|''Format Cells > Numbers'']]

== 字體格式 ==
在單元格中，快速選擇使用的字型，或是選擇單元格，然後從列表中，點擊旁邊的箭頭字體工具欄上的字體選擇

{{Documentation/Tip| 要選擇是否顯示的字體名稱的字體或在純文本，進入“ 工具 > 選項 ”> OpenOffice.org“在字體列表部分，查看並選擇或取消預覽的字體選擇。.有關更多資訊，見附錄D}}

要選擇字體的大小，點選格式工具欄上，對於其他格式，您可以使用粗體，斜體，或下劃線圖標。.
要選擇字體顏色，請單選旁邊的箭頭圖標，字體顏色顯示調色板.單擊所需的顏色。

[[Image:CalcFontColors.png]]

(自訂顏色, 請使用 '''工具> 選項 > OpenOffice.org > 顏色。請見附錄D獲得更多資訊.)

要指定有用的語言單元格（因為它允許存在不同的語言在同一文件中，並正確拼寫檢查），使用字體選項上的格式對話框。請見第10章獲得更多資訊。.

== 字體效果 ==
字體效果標籤的格式對話框，提供了更多的字體選項。

[[Image:CalcFontEffects.png|thumb|none|500px|''Format Cells > Font Effects'']]

=== 底線 ===
底線強調了下面的數字.

[[Image:CG3Ch2F14.png|thumb|none|500px|''Calc underline options'']]

底線的顏色也在選項中改變

=== 刪除線 ===
刪除線選項在下列數字中概述

[[Image:CG3Ch2F15.png|thumb|none|500px|''Calc strikethrough options'']]

=== 浮雕 ===
浮雕選項:浮凸、雕刻、輪廓和陰影，如下所示。

[[Image:CG3Ch2F16.png|thumb|none|500px|''Calc relief options'']]

== 設定表格的對齊方式與方式 ==
有些表格的對齊方式和方向不會顯示格式工具欄上，展示出來，可以點選工具欄，從列表中選擇它們的圖標。

[[Image:CG3Ch2F17.png|thumb|none|500px|''Cell alignment and orientation'']]

對齊方式和方向圖標僅當您有亞洲佈局模式（複雜文本）語言功能（在工具 “> 選項 ”> 語言設置 “> 語言）。如果您從列表中，選擇一個不可用圖標，它不會出現在工具欄上。

為了更好控制和選擇，使用對齊選項格式對話框中設置水平和垂直對齊和旋轉文本。如果您有亞洲語言的啟用，則文本方向部分顯示多了一種選擇（標有亞洲佈局模式）下的垂直堆疊選項，如下所示。

[[Image:CG3Ch2F18.png|thumb|none|500px|''Asian layout mode option'']]

亞洲之間的佈局模式或關閉結果的差別如下所示。

[[Image:CG3Ch2F19.png|thumb|none|500px|''Types of vertical stacking'']]

== 邊框的格式 ==
要迅速選擇線條樣式和顏色的邊界單元格，請按一下圖標格式工具欄上線條樣式和線條顏色。在每一種情況下，調色板的選擇顯示。

欲了解更多的控制，包括間距之間的單元格邊框和文本，使用邊框選項格式對話框。參見第10章的細節。在那裡，您還可以定義陰影。

{{Documentation/Note| 邊框屬性應用於一個單元格，才能更改，如果你正在編輯的單元格。例如，如果單元格C3有頂部邊框，要選擇C3才能刪除。它並不能刪除在C2。}}

== 表格背景格式 ==
要迅速選擇背景顏色，按一下圖標背景顏色格式工具欄。背景顏色的選擇，與字體顏色選擇相同。

（想自訂顏色，請使用工具 “> 選項 ”> OpenOffice.org“顏色。見附錄D獲得更多資訊。）

您也可以使用背景選項卡格式對話框。請參見第10章的細節。

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide

2009-09-30T02:08:20Z

Claire:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Spreadsheets with OpenOffice.org 3.x Calc - DRAFT}}

This section contains the draft text of the user guide titled '''OpenOffice.org 3.x Calc Guide'''.

The sequence of chapters has changed since an earlier draft of this book. The list below shows the current sequence.

[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Introducing Calc | Chapter 1 Calc 導論]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Enter edit format | Chapter 2 進入, 編輯,與格式化資料]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Charts and Graphs | Chapter 3 建立圖表與圖形]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Styles and Templates | Chapter 4 使用樣式與模板]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Graphics in Calc | Chapter 5 在Calc的圖形]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Printing exporting emailing | Chapter 6 列印, 匯出,與電子郵件傳送]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Formulas and Functions | Chapter 7 使用公式與函數]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/DataPilot | Chapter 8 DataPilot]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Data Analysis | Chapter 9 資料分析]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Linking Calc Data | Chapter 10 連結 Calc 資料]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Sharing and Reviewing | Chapter 11 分享與回顧 ]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Calc Macros | Chapter 12 Calc Macros]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Calc as a Simple Database | Chapter 13 將 Calc 當作資料庫]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Customizing Calc | Chapter 14 設置與自訂 Calc]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Keyboard Shortcuts | Appendix A 鍵盤快捷鍵]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Description of Functions | Appendix B 功能說明]] 
[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Calc Error Codes | Appendix C Calc 錯誤代碼]]